FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079 802.11bgn WLAN + Bluetooth NGFF1630 Mini Card

Compliance Certification Services Inc. FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079 IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Report No.: T140522W08-RP6 APPENDIX I PHOTOGRAPHS OF TEST SETUP RADIATED EMISSION SETUP PHOTOS Page 30 Rev. 00

OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11b/g/n WLAN + Bluetooth NGFF1630 Mini Card, BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically OEM must inform Broadcom of any changes which may require Class I or Class A. identical to Broadcoms product. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms product may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. B. II permissive changes. Any substituted antenna and RF cable assemblies must be approved by Broadcom in order to maintain compliance. C. applicable regulations in all respects. D. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Page 1 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11b/g/n WLAN + Bluetooth NGFF1630 Mini Card, BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be installed in the display section or underneath the keyboard in Netbook/notebook/laptop/tablet computers to provide at least 5mm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user , or any other person during normal operating condition.

-For portable applications, the WLAN antennas used must be the same antennas as in this filing.

- For standalone SAR testing, the antenna is mounted on lossless foam material for testing. In order to use Broadcom modular approval, PCOEMs must install antennas with nonconductive materials surrounding the antenna. 2. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. Please contact Broadcom for instructions. 3. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079 and IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 4. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 5. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a Page 2 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11b/g/n WLAN + Bluetooth NGFF1630 Mini Card, BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. French:

Cet appareil est conforme avec Industrie Canada exempts de licence standard RSS (s). Lutilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. For PORTABLE applications, the WLAN antennas used must be the same type of antennas as the original Equipment Authorization. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. French:

Pour les applications portables, les antennes WLAN utiliss doivent tre du mme type d'antennes que l'autorisation d'quipement d'origine Page 3 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11b/g/n WLAN + Bluetooth NGFF1630 Mini Card, BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Sous la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, ce transmetteur radio ne peut fonctionner en utilisant une antenne d'un type et un maximum (ou moins) gain approuves pour l'metteur par Industrie Canada. Pour rduire le risque d'interfrence aux autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent tre choisis de manire que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (PIRE) ne dpasse pas ce qui est ncessaire pour une communication russie. This radio transmitter, IC ID: 4324A-BRCM1079, has been approved by Industry Canada in the mobile configuration to operate with the onboard antenna or a detachable WLAN antenna with a maximum gain of 3.9dB/2.4GHz. Any other detachable antennas, with a different type or having a gain greater than 3.9dB/2.4GHz are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. French:

Cet metteur radio, IC ID: 4324A-BRCM107, a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec l'antenne intgre ou une antenne amovible PIFA avec un gain maximum de 3.9dBi/2.4GHz. Toute autre antenne dtachable, avec un type diffrent ou ayant un gain suprieur 3.9dBi est strictement interdit pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. L'impdance d'antenne requise est de 50 ohms. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Pour se conformer aux exigences de conformit 102 RSS RF exposition, pour des configurations mobiles, une distance de sparation d'au moins 20 cm doit tre maintenue entre l'antenne de cet appareil et toutes les personnes. Cet appareil ne doit pas tre co-

localiss ou fonctionnant en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou transmetteur. System integrators must include a label with Contains IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 on the end product. Industry Canada user statements should be provided in both English and French, at the time each product is offered for sale or lease in Canada. Les intgrateurs de systmes doivent comporter une tiquette avec Contient IC: 4324A-

BRCM1079" sur le produit final. Comptes d'utilisateur d'Industrie Canada devraient tre fournis en anglais et en franais, au moment o chaque produit est offert la vente ou la location au Canada. For portable configurations, antennas must be installed in the display section or underneath the keyboard in Netbook/notebook/laptop/tablet computers to provide at least Page 4 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11b/g/n WLAN + Bluetooth NGFF1630 Mini Card, BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 5mm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user, or any other person during normal operating condition. Pour les configurations portables, les antennes doivent tre installes dans la section d'affichage ou sous le clavier netbook / notebook / ordinateur portable / tablette ordinateurs pour fournir au moins 5 mm distance de sparation entre l'antenne d'mission sur le corps de l'utilisateur, ou toute autre personne au cours de fonctionnement normal . 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 2155 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN Indoor Use IEEE 802.11a Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Page 5 of 9 For Broadcom 802.11b/g/n WLAN + Bluetooth NGFF1630 Mini Card, BCM943142Y OEM Installation Guidance Document FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Czech:

User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France (Removed after July 1, 2012):

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Italy:

For private use, a general authorisation is required if WAS/RLANs are used outside own premises. For public use, a general authorisation is required Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Page 6 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11b/g/n WLAN + Bluetooth NGFF1630 Mini Card, BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.

6. Argentina Page 7 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11b/g/n WLAN + Bluetooth NGFF1630 Mini Card, BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia POSTEL, Kenya CCK, Nepal - NTA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.15-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. 11. Mexico PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide User Manual in Spanish in Mexico. The User Manual must feature the following mandatory statement:

Page 8 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11b/g/n WLAN + Bluetooth NGFF1630 Mini Card, BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia prejudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Translation:

The operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this equipment or device must not cause harmful interference and

(2) this equipment or device must accept any interference, including interference which could otherwise cause its undesired operation. 12. CB Certifications PC-OEMs must provide User Guides in the language suitable for the countries when shipping products to countries listed in the CB reports. 13. Moldova- Labeling to be included Proper Marking must be included on each certified unit shipping into Moldova, Page 9 of 9

OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically OEM must inform Broadcom of any changes which may require Class I or Class A. identical to Broadcoms product. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms product may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. B. II permissive changes. Any substituted antenna and RF cable assemblies must be approved by Broadcom in order to maintain compliance. C. applicable regulations in all respects. D. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Page 1 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be located to provide at least 20cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of the user during normal operating conditions. 2. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 3. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 4. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 5. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 6. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the Page 2 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter, IC ID: 4324A-BRCM1079, has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the onboard antenna or a detachable WLAN antenna with a maximum gain of 3.8dB/2.4GHz . Any other detachable antennas, with a different type or having a gain greater than 3.8dB/2.4GHz are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device)

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Page 3 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. System integrators must include a label with Contains IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 on the end product. Industry Canada user statements should be provided in both English and French, at the time each product is offered for sale or lease in Canada. French:

Cet appareil est conforme avec Industrie Canada exempts de licence standard RSS (s) l'opration est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes: . ( 1) ce dispositif ne doit pas causer d'interfrences et ( 2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence , y compris les interfrences qui peuvent provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement de l'appareil. Conformment la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut fonctionner l'aide d'une antenne d'un type et maximum ( ou moins ) Gain approuv pour l'metteur par Industrie Canada. Afin de rduire le risque d'interfrence avec d'autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent tre choisi que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (PIRE ) ne dpasse pas ce qui est ncessaire pour une communication russie . Cet metteur radio , IC ID: 4324A BRCM1079 , a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec l'antenne intgre ou une antenne WLAN amovible avec un gain maximum de 3.8dB/2.4GHz Les autres antennes dtachables, avec . un type diffrent ou d'avoir un gain suprieur 3.8dB/2.4GHz sont strictement interdits pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. L'impdance d'antenne requise est de 50 ohms. Attention: (ceci ne s'applique un appareil UNII )

(I) l'appareil pour fonctionner dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv une utilisation en intrieur afin de rduire les risques d'interfrence nuisible aux systmes mobiles par satellite co- canal;

(ii) le gain d'antenne maximal autoris pour les dispositifs dans les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz doivent respecter la limite de pire , et

( iii) le gain d'antenne maximal autoris pour les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5725-5825 MHz doivent respecter les limites de pire spcifies pour le point --point et l'exploitation non point point , le cas chant . Les radars haute puissance sont dsigns comme utilisateurs principaux de 5,25 5,35 GHz et 5,65 5,85 GHz . Ces stations radars peuvent causer des interfrences et / ou endommager cet appareil . Attention: Exposition aux radiations de frquences radio. Pour se conformer aux normes RSS 102 exigences de conformit d'exposition aux radiofrquences , pour les configurations mobiles , une distance de sparation d'au moins Page 4 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 20 cm doit tre maintenue entre l' antenne de cet appareil et toutes les personnes . Cet appareil ne doit pas tre co- localises ou oprant en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou transmetteur . Les intgrateurs de systmes doivent comporter une tiquette avec Contient IC: 4324A BRCM1079 " . Sur le produit final comptes d'utilisateur d'Industrie Canada devraient tre fournis en anglais et en franais , au moment o chaque produit est offert la vente ou la location au Canada. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 0560 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations.

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN Indoor Use IEEE 802.11a Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

Page 5 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France (Removed after July 1, 2012):

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Italy:

For private use, a general authorisation is required if WAS/RLANs are used outside own premises. For public use, a general authorisation is required Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive.

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Page 6 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.

6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. Page 7 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia POSTEL, Kenya CCK, Nepal - NTA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.15-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. 11. Mexico PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide User Manual in Spanish in Mexico. The User Manual must feature the following mandatory statement:

La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia prejudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Page 8 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom BCM943142Y FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1079; IC: 4324A-BRCM1079 Translation:

The operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this equipment or device must not cause harmful interference and

(2) this equipment or device must accept any interference, including interference which could otherwise cause its undesired operation. 12. CB Certifications PC-OEMs must provide User Guides in the language suitable for the countries when shipping products to countries listed in the CB reports. 13. Moldova- Labeling to be included Proper Marking must be included on each certified unit shipping into Moldova, Page 9 of 9

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 20082011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Third Edition: August 2011 First Edition: February 2011 Document Part Number: 653267-003 Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union Regulatory notices ..................................................................................................... 4 Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules .................................................................... 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 8 South Korea notice ............................................................................................................................... 8 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 8 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 9 Taiwan notices ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 9 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 9 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................... 9 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 10 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 10 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 11 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 11 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 12 iii U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 13 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 15 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 15 Voice support .................................................................................................... 16 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 16 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 16 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 17 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 17 2 Safety notices ................................................................................................................................................ 18 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 18 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 18 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 18 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 19 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 19 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 19 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 20 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 20 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 20 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 21 China material content declarations ................................................................................................... 21 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 23 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................. 24 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 24 Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances ................................................................................... 24 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 24 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 25 iv 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. For later Windows operating systems, such as Windows 7, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. To view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. 1 CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has wired and/or wireless telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available (in English only) either within the product documentation or at the following Web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (type the product number in the search box). The compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product:

4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices For non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth, within power class below 10 mW. For EU non-harmonized telecommunications products (if applicable, a 4-digit notified body number is inserted between CE and ! (the exclamation mark). Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The telephone connector (not available for all products) is intended for connection to analog telephone networks. NOTE: For products with wireless LAN devices, some countries may have specific obligations or special requirements about the operation of wireless LAN networks such as indoor use only or restrictions of the channels available. Be sure that the country settings of the wireless network are correct. In France, certain restrictions apply for the 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product. This product may be used indoors for the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 13). For outdoor use, only the 2400-MHz to 2454-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 7) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.arcep.fr. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Mobile Broadband Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. European Union Regulatory notices 5 The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Ergonomics notice Germany Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the ergonomic requirements and are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. When a mobile computer is used for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 This device is intended for use at visual display workplaces in compliance with BildscharbV, only with external keyboard and adequate external monitor. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur which result in reduced readability. Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 Das Gert ist fr die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV nur mit externer Tastatur und geeignetem Monitor vorgesehen. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Japan notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Bluetooth devices Japan notices 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notice Mexico notice La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) este equipo puede que no cause interferencia y (2) este equipo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo interferencia que pueda ser causada por la operacin no deseada. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general in household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after 15 minutes Initiate Sleep after 30 minutes The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Laser compliance 11 U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 13 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Modem notices 15 c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision Corporation notice 17 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Headset and earphone volume level notice 19 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service. 20 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chemical substances 21 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Japan material content declaration 23 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Index A airline travel notice 9 B battery notice 10, 18, 24 battery recycling 20 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 19 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 4 Canadian French notices 4 China Material Content Declarations 21 D DC plug of external HP power supply notice 17 Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 24 battery, user replacement 10 equipment 20 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 20 ENERGY STAR compliance 10 environmental notices 20 equipment disposal notice 20 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 4 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 19 J Japan material content declaration 23 Japan modem statement 15 Japan notice 7 Japan power cord notice 16 K keyboard notice 19 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice Mexico Sustainable Energy Use 17 Law 24 Mexico wireless notice 8 modem notices 11 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 15 New Zealand 15 U.S. 12 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 notices airline travel 9 battery 10, 24 battery, user replacement 18 Brazil 4 Canada 4 Canadian French 4 DC plug of external HP power supply 17 environmental 20 equipment disposal 20 ergonomics 6 European Union 4 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 19 Japan 7 Japan power cord 16 keyboard 19 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 17 Mexico 8 modem 11 perchlorate material 24 power cords 16, 19 Singapore 8 South Korea 8 Taiwan 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 travel 19 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 24 N New Zealand modem statement 15 P power cord notice 16, 19 Index 25 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 20 S Singapore wireless notice 8 South Korea notice 8 T Taiwan notice 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice travel notice 19 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 9 19 U U.S. modem statement 12 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 24 V voice support 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 19 W wireless LAN devices 3 26 Index

Informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation Manuel de l'utilisateur Copyright 2012 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth est une marque dtenue par son propritaire et utilise sous licence par Hewlett-Packard Company. ENERGY STAR est une marque dpose du gouvernement des tats-Unis. Java est une marque dpose de Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows et Windows Vista sont des marques dposes de Microsoft Corporation aux tats-Unis. Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent tre modifies sans pravis. Les garanties relatives aux produits et aux services HP sont dcrites dans les dclarations de garantie limite expresse qui les accompagnent. Aucun lment du prsent document ne peut tre interprt comme constituant une garantie supplmentaire. HP ne saurait tre tenu pour responsable des erreurs ou omissions de nature technique ou rdactionnelle qui pourraient subsister dans le prsent document. Troisime dition : septembre 2012 Deuxime dition : juillet 2012 Premire dition : mars 2012 Rfrence du document : 689409-053 propos de ce manuel Ce manuel fournit des informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation en conformit avec les rglementations amricaines, canadiennes et internationales en matire d'ordinateurs portables, d'ordinateurs de bureau, de clients lgers et de stations de travail personnelles. AVERTISSEMENT ! Le non-respect des instructions expose l'utilisateur des risques potentiellement trs graves. ATTENTION : Le non-respect des instructions prsente des risques, tant pour le matriel que pour les informations qu'il contient. REMARQUE : Le texte ainsi dfini fournit des informations importantes supplmentaires. iii iv propos de ce manuel Sommaire 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables ................................................................................ 1 Rglementation FCC ............................................................................................................................ 3 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 3 Cbles .................................................................................................................................. 3 Dclaration de conformit des produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) ....... 4 Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules HP Mobile Broadband ........................... 4 Avis pour le Brsil ................................................................................................................................. 5 Avis pour le Canada ............................................................................................................................. 5 Avis pour l'Union europenne .............................................................................................................. 6 Dclaration de conformit .................................................................................................... 6 Produits quips de modules sans fil (EMF) ....................................................... 7 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) ................. 7 Avis sur l'ergonomie ............................................................................................ 8 Allemagne (texte en franais) ............................................................. 8 Allemagne (texte en allemand) ........................................................... 8 Avis pour le Japon ................................................................................................................................ 9 Priphriques LAN, priphriques WAN et marques de certification pour les priphriques Bluetooth ..................................................................................................... 10 Avis pour la Core du Sud ................................................................................................................. 10 Avis pour le Mexique .......................................................................................................................... 10 Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour .................................................................................... 11 Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande ................................................................... 11 Avis pour Tawan ................................................................................................................................ 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11a ........................................................................................... 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11b ........................................................................................... 12 Avis sur les utilisations en vol ............................................................................................................. 12 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ............................................................................ 12 Conformit ENERGY STAR ............................................................................................................ 12 Conformit du laser ............................................................................................................................ 13 Avis sur les modems .......................................................................................................................... 14 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication ................................................. 14 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................... 14 v Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis ............................................................. 16 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................ 17 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................... 17 Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................ 17 Support vocal .................................................................................................... 18 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation .................................................................................................... 18 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon ............................................................. 18 Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP .............................................................. 18 Avis de Macrovision Corporation ........................................................................................................ 19 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles ...................................................................................................................................................... 20 Avis sur les modems .......................................................................................................................... 20 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication ................................................. 20 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................... 21 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................ 22 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................... 22 Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................ 22 Assistance vocale ............................................................................................. 23 Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique ............................................................................................ 23 Avis de la FCC ................................................................................................................... 24 Modifications ..................................................................................................... 24 Cbles ............................................................................................................... 24 Dclaration de conformit pour les produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) ...................................................................................................... 25 Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil ............................................... 25 Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie ................................................... 25 Avis pour le Brsil .............................................................................................................. 26 Avis pour le Canada .......................................................................................................... 26 Avis pour l'Union europenne ............................................................................................ 26 Dclaration de conformit ................................................................................. 26 Produits quips de modules sans fil ............................................... 27 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/

fax) .................................................................................................... 28 Avis sur l'ergonomie ......................................................................... 28 Avis pour le Japon ............................................................................................................. 28 Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth ....................... 29 Avis pour la Core du Sud ................................................................................................. 29 Avis pour le Mexique ......................................................................................................... 30 Avis pour Tawan ............................................................................................................... 30 vi 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables ....................................................................................... 31 Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur ....................................................................................... 31 Avis sur les risques lis la scurit .................................................................................................. 31 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ............................................................................ 32 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs ................................................................ 32 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation .................................................................................................... 33 Nettoyage du clavier ........................................................................................................................... 33 Avis sur les dplacements .................................................................................................................. 33 Avis de scurit pour la Chine ............................................................................................................ 34 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................... 34 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales .......................................... 34 Norvge et Sude : notice de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ... 34 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles ...................................................................................................................................................... 35 Informations importantes relatives la scurit ................................................................................. 35 Conditions d'installation ...................................................................................................................... 36 Avis sur le remplacement de la batterie ............................................................................................. 36 Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs ............................................................................. 37 Informations de scurit relatives au laser ......................................................................................... 37 Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation ............................................. 37 Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 ............................. 37 Danemark .......................................................................................................... 38 Finlande ............................................................................................................ 38 Norvge ............................................................................................................. 38 Sude ................................................................................................................ 38 Exigences relatives l'alimentation ................................................................................... 38 Pour une utilisation en Norvge ........................................................................ 38 Cordons d'alimentation requis ........................................................................................... 39 Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon ...................................................... 39 Risque de pincement .......................................................................................................................... 39 Avis de scurit pour la Chine ............................................................................................................ 40 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................... 40 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales .......................................... 40 Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne .................................................................................................... 41 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables ...................................................... 42 Recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie ......................................................................... 42 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................... 42 Substances chimiques ....................................................................................................................... 42 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine .............................................................................................. 43 vii Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ....................................... 43 Dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon ..................................................................... 46 Loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie ........................................................................... 46 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie .................................................................................................... 46 Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine ................................................... 46 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................... 46 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles .......................................................................................................................................... 47 Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries .......................................................................... 47 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................... 47 Conformit ENERGY STAR (certains modles) .............................................................................. 47 Substances chimiques ....................................................................................................................... 49 Avis sur le mercure ............................................................................................................................. 49 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................... 49 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ....................................... 49 The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................... 50 Dclarations IT ECO .......................................................................................................................... 51 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) ....................................... 52 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie) ......................................................................................................... 52 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie .................................................................................................... 52

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine) .............................................................................................................. 53 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 54 viii 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Ce chapitre fournit des avis de rglementation spcifiques des pays et des rgions concernant les produits filaires et sans fil, ainsi que des informations de conformit concernant l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis peuvent ne pas s'appliquer votre produit. Un ou plusieurs priphriques sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer dans les avions, dans les hpitaux, proximit d'explosifs, dans des lieux dangereux, etc. Si vous n'tes pas sr des rgles qui s'appliquent ce produit, demandez si vous pouvez l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Pour identifier un priphrique matriel, tel qu'un priphrique rseau LAN sans fil (WLAN), choisissez la procdure ci-dessous qui correspond au systme d'exploitation excut sur votre ordinateur. Sous Windows Vista, procdez comme suit :

1. Slectionnez Dmarrer > Ordinateur > Proprits systme. 2. Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Gestionnaire de priphriques. Sous Windows 7, procdez comme suit :

Slectionnez Dmarrer > Panneau de configuration > Systme et scurit > Gestionnaire de priphriques. Sous Windows 8, procdez comme suit :

1. Dans l'cran d'accueil, tapez c, puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration. 2. Slectionnez Systme et scurit, puis slectionnez Gestionnaire de priphriques dans la zone Systme. La liste de tous les priphriques installs sur votre ordinateur s'affiche. Pour les systmes d'exploitation non Windows, suivez les instructions fournies par votre systme d'exploitation pour identifier un priphrique matriel tel qu'un priphrique rseau LAN sans fil

(WLAN). Des tiquettes de rglementation spcifiques votre pays ou rgion peuvent tre apposes sous le produit : sous la batterie, sous une trappe accessible par l'utilisateur (ou tout autre emplacement accessible par l'utilisateur), sur le module sans fil ou sur le modem. 1 Sous Windows 7, pour consulter le numro d'identification FCC d'un module radio de votre ordinateur portable (par exemple, Bluetooth, WLAN ou WWAN), procdez comme suit :

1. 2. 3. Allumez ou redmarrez l'ordinateur puis appuyez sur echap lorsque le message Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Pour accder au menu de dmarrage, appuyez sur la touche echap) s'affiche en bas de l'cran. Appuyez sur f10 pour accder au BIOS. Slectionnez le menu System Configuration (Configuration du systme). Sous Windows 8, procdez comme suit :

1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension ou redmarrez-le, puis appuyez sur la touche echap lorsque le message Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Pour accder au menu de dmarrage, appuyez sur la touche echap) apparat en bas de l'cran. 2. Appuyez sur f10 pour accder Computer Setup. Les identifiants FCC sont affichs en bas de l'cran. ATTENTION : Les appareils qui ne sont pas destins la vente ou une utilisation aux tats-Unis ne possdent peut-tre pas d'identifiants FCC. 2 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Rglementation FCC Le prsent quipement a t test et dclar conforme aux limites d'un appareil numrique de Classe B, telles que dfinies dans l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences prjudiciables dans un environnement rsidentiel. Le prsent quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre une nergie de radiofrquence et, s'il n'est pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, peut entraner des interfrences prjudiciables pour les radiocommunications. Cependant, tout risque d'interfrences ne peut tre totalement exclu dans certains environnements spcifiques. Si ce matriel devait provoquer des interfrences avec une radio ou un tlviseur, ce qu'il est facile de dceler en teignant puis en rallumant ce matriel, il est alors vivement conseill l'utilisateur d'essayer de supprimer ces interfrences en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. loigner le matriel informatique du rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique sur la prise d'un circuit autre que celui sur lequel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Modifications La FCC stipule que l'utilisateur doit tre inform que toute modification opre sur l'appareil, n'ayant pas t expressment approuve par HP, peut entraner l'annulation des droits d'exploitation du produit dont bnficie l'utilisateur. Cbles Pour tre conformes la rglementation de la FCC, les connexions d'entre de l'appareil doivent tre tablies avec des cbles blinds munis d'embouts de connecteurs RFI/EMI mtalliques. Rglementation FCC 3 Dclaration de conformit des produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) Cet appareil est conforme l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Son utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interfrences nuisibles. 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toutes interfrences reues, notamment des interfrences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement non voulu. Si vous souhaitez poser des questions sur le produit qui ne sont pas en rapport avec cette dclaration, crivez l'adresse suivante :

Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000, tats-Unis Pour toute question concernant cette dclaration FCC, crivez-nous l'adresse suivante :

Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000, tats-Unis ou appelez HP au (281) 514-3333. Pour identifier le produit, reportez-vous au numro de rfrence, de srie ou de modle inscrit sur le produit. Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules HP Mobile Broadband Cet appareil ne doit pas tre situ proximit d'une autre antenne ou d'un metteur, ni fonctionner en mme temps. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux rayonnements de frquence radio La puissance de sortie mise par cet appareil est nettement infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par le FCC. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant le fonctionnement normal des tablettes et des ordinateurs portables. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : Pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par la FCC, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. 4 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables ATTENTION : Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. La FCC exige que ce matriel soit utilis l'intrieur pour la plage de frquences comprise entre 5,15 et 5,25 GHz, afin de rduire les risques d'interfrence avec les systmes de satellites du service mobile du canal commun. Un radar puissance leve est allou comme premier utilisateur des bandes de frquence allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent entraner des interfrences avec cet appareil et/ou l'endommager. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de Classe B respecte toutes les exigences des rglementations canadiennes sur les quipements pouvant causer des interfrences. Si ce priphrique est quip de fonctions WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dictes par Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions : (1) ce priphrique ne doit pas gnrer d'interfrence et (2) ce priphrique doit supporter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient entraner un mauvais fonctionnement. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio : la puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. ATTENTION : Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce matriel soit utilis l'intrieur pour la plage de frquences comprise entre 5,15 et 5,25 GHz, afin de rduire les risques d'interfrence avec les systmes de satellites du service mobile du canal commun. Un radar puissance leve est allou comme premier utilisateur des bandes de frquence allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent entraner des interfrences avec cet appareil et/ou l'endommager. Les antennes de ce priphrique ne sont pas remplaables. Toute tentative d'accs par l'utilisateur endommagera l'ordinateur. Avis pour le Brsil 5 Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant la marque CE sont conformes une ou plusieurs directives de l'UE suivantes, le cas chant :

Directive relative la basse tension 2006/95/CE Directive EMC 2004/108/CE Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE Directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE La conformit CE de ce produit est uniquement valable si ce dernier est aliment par un adaptateur secteur estampill CE (le cas chant) et un cordon d'alimentation fournis par HP. Reportez-vous la section Cordons d'alimentation requis la page 39. La conformit ces directives implique la conformit aux normes europennes harmonises applicables (normes europennes) qui sont prsentes dans la dclaration de conformit de l'UE dicte par HP pour ce produit ou cette gamme de produits et disponibles soit dans la documentation du produit soit sur le site Web suivant : www.hp.eu/certificates (effectuez une recherche partir du nom de modle du produit ou de son numro de produit, accessible sur l'tiquette de conformit). La conformit est reprsente par la marque de conformit CE ci-aprs. Pour certains produits de tlcommunications, le numro 4 chiffres d'un organisme de certification peut tre ajout en suffixe. Reportez-vous l'tiquette de conformit appose sur le produit. La fonctionnalit de tlcommunications de ce produit peut tre utilise dans les pays de l'Union europenne et de l'AELE suivants : Allemagne, Autriche, Belgique, Bulgarie, Chypre, Danemark, Espagne, Estonie, Finlande, France, Grce, Hongrie, Irlande, Islande, Lettonie, Liechtenstein, Lituanie, Luxembourg, Malte, Norvge, Pays-Bas, Pologne, Portugal, Rpublique tchque, Roumanie, Royaume-Uni, Slovaquie, Slovnie, Sude et Suisse. Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, contactez Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS cette adresse : HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, ALLEMAGNE. 6 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Produits quips de modules sans fil (EMF) CET APPAREIL EST CONFORME AUX NORMES INTERNATIONALES EN MATIRE D'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONNEMENTS DE FRQUENCE RADIO. Le module sans fil intgr votre ordinateur portable est un metteur et rcepteur radio. Cet appareil est conu pour ne pas dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dfinies par des directives internationales (ICNIRP). Ces limites sont dfinies dans le cadre de directives qui tablissent les niveaux autoriss de rayonnements de frquence radio pour l'ensemble de la population. Ces directives, dictes par des organismes scientifiques indpendants, s'appuient sur une valuation rgulire et minutieuse de diffrentes tudes scientifiques. Cet appareil est galement conforme aux directives R&TTE europennes relatives la protection de la sant et de la scurit des personnes. La norme d'exposition dfinie pour les appareils mobiles utilise une unit de mesure appele SAR

(Specific Absorption Rate, taux d'absorption spcifique).* Ce taux a t obtenu via des tests au cours desquels les appareils ont effectu des transmissions au niveau de puissance certifi le plus lev, dans toutes les bandes de frquence. Le taux SAR rel de l'appareil en cours de fonctionnement peut tre bien infrieur la valeur maximale dfinie, dans la mesure o il fonctionne diffrents niveaux de puissance et utilise uniquement la puissance requise pour atteindre le rseau. Install dans l'ordinateur portable, cet appareil est conforme aux directives en matire d'exposition aux frquences radio lorsque les antennes se trouvent une distance minimale du corps. Pour transmettre des donnes ou des messages, l'appareil doit disposer d'une connexion de qualit au rseau. Dans certains cas, les transmissions de donnes ou de messages peuvent tre retardes jusqu' ce qu'une connexion soit disponible. Veillez respecter la distance conseille jusqu' la fin de la transmission.

*Les directives internationales autres que celles de la FCC indiquent que la limite SAR pour les appareils mobiles utiliss par le grand public est de 2 watts/kilogramme (W/kg), calcul sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de masse tissulaire. Ces directives incluent une marge de scurit importante pour une protection accrue du grand public et pour tenir compte des variations dans les mesures. Les valeurs SAR peuvent varier selon les exigences locales en matire de reporting et selon la bande du rseau. Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive 1999/5/CE (annexe II) sur les quipements hertziens et quipements terminaux de tlcommunications et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts

(RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Avis pour l'Union europenne 7 Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Lorsqu'un ordinateur portable est utilis sur une station de travail professionnelle dans le cadre d'un travail sur cran de visualisation o la directive 90/270/CEE relative aux crans de visualisation est applicable, un clavier externe adapt est recommand. Selon l'application et le travail ralis, un moniteur externe adapt peut galement tre ncessaire pour obtenir des conditions de travail comparables celles d'une station de travail. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (certification GS volontaire) Les ordinateurs portables portant la marque d'homologation GS sont conformes aux exigences en matire d'ergonomie. Sans clavier externe, ils sont uniquement adapts aux tches ponctuelles sur cran de visualisation. Une utilisation mobile dans de mauvaises conditions de luminosit (par exemple, lumire directe du soleil) peut occasionner des reflets et donc rduire la lisibilit. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. 8 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis pour le Japon Avis pour le Japon 9 Priphriques LAN, priphriques WAN et marques de certification pour les priphriques Bluetooth This product contains certified radio equipment. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. 10 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour Mettez hors tension les priphriques WWAN lorsque vous tes bord d'avions. L'utilisation de ces appareils bord d'avions est illgale, peut tre dangereuse pour le fonctionnement de l'avion et risque de perturber le rseau de tlphonie mobile. Le non-respect de cette instruction peut entraner la suspension ou le refus de services cellulaires au contrevenant, ou des actions juridiques, ou les deux. Les utilisateurs doivent limiter l'emploi d'quipement radio dans des dpts de carburant, usines chimiques et l o des explosions sont en cours. Comme pour les autres quipements mobiles de transmission par frquences radiolectriques, il est recommand aux utilisateurs, pour le bon fonctionnement de leur quipement et pour la scurit du personnel, de ne pas trop approcher les antennes du corps humain au cours du fonctionnement de l'quipement. Ce priphrique a t conu pour tre conforme aux exigences applicables pour l'exposition aux ondes radio, en fonction de normes scientifiques qui comprennent des plages destines assurer la scurit de tout le monde, quel que soit l'ge et l'tat de sant. Ces rgles d'exposition aux ondes radio utilisent une unit de mesure appele taux d'absorption spcifique (SAR - Specific Absorption Rate). Les tests relatifs aux taux d'absorption sont mens l'aide de mthodes standardises, le tlphone transmettant son niveau de certifi le plus lev dans toutes les bandes de frquences utilises. Les informations de donnes SAR se basent sur les normes EN50360 et EN50361 de CENELEC, qui utilisent la limite de 2 watts par kilogramme, sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de tissu. Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande Cet quipement de tlcommunications est conforme aux rglementations de la NTC. Avis pour Tawan Priphriques WLAN 802.11a Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11b Avis sur les utilisations en vol L'utilisation d'quipement lectronique bord d'un avion commercial est laisse la discrtion de la compagnie arienne. Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur Lorsqu'une batterie atteint la fin de sa vie utile, ne la jetez pas avec les dchets mnagers ordinaires. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries d'ordinateur. HP encourage ses clients recycler les quipements lectroniques usags, les cartouches d'impression HP d'origine et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP l'adresse http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour des informations sur le retrait d'une batterie remplaable par l'utilisateur, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit. Conformit ENERGY STAR En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, HP a suivi le processus avanc de qualification et de certification des produits de l'EPA pour s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR respectaient les rglementations ENERGY STAR en matire de rendement lectrique. Le logo suivant apparat sur tous les ordinateurs respectant les spcifications ENERGY STAR :

Le programme ENERGY STAR pour les ordinateurs a t cr par l'EPA pour encourager l'efficacit nergtique et rduire la pollution atmosphrique grce l'utilisation d'quipements meilleur 12 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables rendement lectrique chez soi, au bureau et dans les usines. Une manire d'atteindre cet objectif consiste utiliser la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation de Microsoft Windows pour rduire la consommation d'nergie lorsque le produit n'est pas utilis. Cette fonction permet la mise en mode veille de l'ordinateur aprs une priode d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction avec un moniteur conforme au programme ENERGY STAR, les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation du moniteur sont galement prises en charge. Pour profiter de ces conomies d'nergie potentielles, la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation est prconfigure comme suit lorsque le systme fonctionne sur secteur :

Dsactivation de l'cran aprs 10 minutes Mise en veille aprs 20 minutes Le mode veille est dsactiv par une simple pression sur le bouton d'alimentation/de veille. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN d'veil par appel rseau est active, le mode veille peut galement tre dsactiv en rponse un signal du rseau. Vous trouverez des informations complmentaires sur les conomies nergtiques et financires ralisables avec la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation sur le site Web du programme ENERGY STAR de l'U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), cette adresse http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Vous trouverez galement des informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses avantages pour l'environnement sur le site Web ENERGY STAR de l'U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), cette adresse http://www.energystar.gov. Conformit du laser AVERTISSEMENT ! L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation d'appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de pice rparable par l'utilisateur. N'utilisez pas de commandes, n'excutez aucun rglage ni aucune procdure au priphrique laser autre que ceux qui figurent dans le manuel d'installation du produit laser. Seul un mainteneur agr est autoris rparer l'unit. Ce produit peut tre fourni avec un priphrique de stockage optique (par exemple, un lecteur de CD ou DVD) et/ou un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Chacun de ces appareils qui contient un laser est class comme produit laser de classe 1 conformment la norme CEI/EN 60825-1 et rpond aux critres de scurit de cette norme. Chaque produit laser est conforme aux paragraphes 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 des rglementations FDA des tats-Unis ou est conforme ces rglementations l'exception des dviations relatives l'avis sur le laser No. 50, en date du 24 juin 2007. Conformit du laser 13 Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe en effet un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz, si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si cet appareil n'a pas t fourni avec un cordon tlphonique, n'utilisez qu'un cordon tlphonique No. 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez pas un cble de modem ou de tlphone dans la prise rseau (RJ-45). GARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunication du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas compatible, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN 14 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu'

ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems 15 Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Reportez-vous aux dclarations du fabricant du modem ci-aprs pour le modem install dans votre ordinateur :

16 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux spcifications techniques d'Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN indique le nombre maximal d'appareils pouvant tre connects une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison d'appareils quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. La marque de certification japonaise pour le modem fax/donnes V.92 56K figure ci-dessous :

Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge par la ligne de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. *Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. b. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Avis sur les modems 17 c. d. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). Support vocal Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence (111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation Si votre ordinateur ne vous a pas t livr avec un cordon d'alimentation ou un accessoire d'alimentation secteur compatible avec votre ordinateur, vous devrez acheter un cordon d'alimentation homologu pour votre pays ou votre rgion. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre test et garanti pour le produit, pour la tension et le type de courant inscrits sur l'tiquette des valeurs nominales lectriques du produit. Les valeurs nominales de tension et d'intensit du cordon doivent tre suprieures celles indiques sur l'ordinateur. En outre, le diamtre du cordon doit tre au minimum de 0,75 mm/18 AWG et sa longueur doit tre comprise entre 1,5 m (5 pieds) et 2 m (6.5 pieds). Si vous avez des questions sur le type de cordon d'alimentation utiliser, contactez votre fournisseur de service agr. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation de sorte qu'il ne puisse pas tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise secteur et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier du portable. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP 18 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis de Macrovision Corporation Ce produit intgre une technologie de protection des droits d'auteur qui est protge par des revendications de procd de certains brevets amricains et d'autres droits sur la proprit intellectuelle de Macrovision Corporation et d'autres bnficiaires de droits. L'utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d'auteur doit tre autorise par Macrovision Corporation et a pour but de permettre un visionnage domestique et d'autres utilisations limites uniquement, sauf autorisation de Macrovision Corporation. L'ingnierie inverse et le dsassemblage sont interdits. Avis de Macrovision Corporation 19 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe en effet un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil, pour signaler une fuite de gaz, si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si cet appareil n'a pas t fourni avec un cordon tlphonique, n'utilisez qu'un cordon tlphonique No. 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez jamais un cordon de modem ou de tlphone dans la prise RJ-45 (rseau Ethernet). GARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunication du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas support, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. 20 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu'

ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Avis sur les modems 21 Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux normes techniques Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN donne une indication sur le nombre maximum de priphriques qu'il est possible de relier une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison de priphriques quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. Au Japon, la marque de certification pour le modem LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft est la suivante :

Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge par la ligne de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. 22 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. b. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. c. d. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). Assistance vocale Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence (111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique Ce manuel prsente les avis de rglementation relatifs aux fonctions avec et sans fil des diffrents pays et rgions, ainsi que des informations de conformit de l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Un ou plusieurs priphriques sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer dans les avions, dans les hpitaux, prs d'explosifs, dans des lieux dangereux, etc. Si vous n'tes pas sr des rgles qui s'appliquent ce produit, demandez si vous pouvez l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 23 Avis de la FCC Cet quipement a t test et trouv conforme aux limitations relatives aux appareils numriques de classe B, en accord avec l'article 15 des rgles de la FCC. Ces limitations sont conues pour offrir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement produit, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie sous forme de radiofrquences. S'il n'est pas utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut produire des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Cependant, il n'existe aucune garantie assurant qu'il n'y aura pas d'interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si l'utilisateur constate des interfrences lors de la rception d'missions de radio ou de tlvision (il suffit pour le vrifier d'allumer et d'teindre successivement l'appareil), il devra prendre l'une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes pour les liminer savoir :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. Accrotre la distance entre le matriel et le rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique une prise d'un circuit autre que celui auquel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Modifications La FCC requiert que l'utilisateur soit averti que toute modification de cet quipement non approuve expressment pas la socit Hewlett-Packard pourrait annuler le droit de l'utilisateur d'utiliser l'quipement. Cbles Les cbles branchs cet quipement doivent tre blinds et comporter des protections de connecteur mtalliques de type RFI/EMI pour tre conformes aux directives et rglementations de la FCC. 24 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Dclaration de conformit pour les produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) Ce matriel est conforme l'alina 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est sous rserve des deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet quipement ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles et 2. Cet quipement doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences capables de causer un mauvais fonctionnement. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de votre produit, crivez-nous l'adresse :

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Si vous avez des questions au sujet de la dclaration FCC, crivez-nous l'adresse :

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Ou appelez-nous au (281) 514-3333. Pour identifier ce produit, communiquez la rfrence ou le numro de srie ou de modle figurant sur le produit. Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de rseau local sans fil. Ce priphrique ne doit pas tre situ au mme endroit ou fonctionner en mme temps qu'une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition des missions de radiofrquence La puissance de sortie mise par ce priphrique est infrieure aux limites de la FCC sur l'exposition des missions de radiofrquence. Nanmoins, le priphrique doit tre utilis de faon ce que les risques de contact physique soient rduits pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 20 cm

(8 pouces) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. ATTENTION : Si vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, l'appareil ne doit tre utilis qu' l'intrieur d'un btiment, car il fonctionne dans une bande de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Il s'agit d'une rglementation de la FCC visant rduire le risque d'interfrences nuisibles aux systmes mobiles par satellite utilisant les mmes canaux. Les bandes de frquences allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont rserves aux stations radars trs puissantes. Celles-ci peuvent causer des interfrences et/ou endommager l'appareil. Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008. AVERTISSEMENT ! Modems without integral RJ-11 that are shipped with this computer must be installed only in devices displaying the A-tick. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 25 Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. ATTENTION : A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Si cet appareil dispose d'une fonctionnalit WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS pour les appareil exempts de licence d'Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est sous rserve des deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interfrences et

(2) cet appareil doit tolrer toute interfrence, notamment les interfrences pouvant engendrer un mauvais fonctionnement de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio La puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 20 cm

(8 pouces) des antennes. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. ATTENTION : En cas d'utilisation d'un rseau LAN IEEE 802.11a, ce produit doit uniquement tre utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment, en raison de son fonctionnement sur la plage de frquence de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment pour la plage de frquence allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz afin de rduire le risque d'interfrences prjudiciables pour les systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant le mme canal. Les plages de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont alloues prioritairement aux radars haute puissance. Ces stations radar peuvent provoquer des interfrences avec cet appareil ou l'endommager. L'antenne de cet appareil ne se remplace pas. Toute tentative de modification par l'utilisateur peut endommager l'ordinateur. Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant la marque CE sont conformes une ou plusieurs directives de l'UE suivantes, le cas chant :

Directive relative la basse tension 2006/95/CE Directive EMC 2004/108/CE Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE Directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE 26 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles La conformit CE de ce produit n'est valide que s'il est aliment par un adaptateur secteur estampill CE (le cas chant) et un cordon d'alimentation fournis par HP. Reportez-vous la section Cordons d'alimentation requis la page 39. La conformit ces directives implique la conformit aux normes europennes harmonises applicables (normes europennes) qui sont prsentes dans la dclaration de conformit de l'UE dicte par HP pour ce produit ou cette gamme de produits et disponibles soit dans la documentation du produit soit sur le site Web suivant : www.hp.eu/certificates (effectuez une recherche partir du nom de modle du produit ou de son numro de produit, accessible sur l'tiquette de conformit). La conformit est reprsente par la marque de conformit CE ci-aprs. Pour certains produits de tlcommunications, le numro 4 chiffres d'un organisme de certification peut tre ajout en suffixe. Reportez-vous l'tiquette de conformit appose sur le produit. La fonctionnalit de tlcommunications de ce produit peut tre utilise dans les pays de l'Union europenne et de l'AELE suivants : Allemagne, Autriche, Belgique, Bulgarie, Chypre, Danemark, Espagne, Estonie, Finlande, France, Grce, Hongrie, Irlande, Islande, Lettonie, Liechtenstein, Lituanie, Luxembourg, Malte, Norvge, Pays-Bas, Pologne, Portugal, Rpublique tchque, Roumanie, Royaume-Uni, Slovaquie, Slovnie, Sude et Suisse. Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, envoyez un courrier : Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Allemagne. Produits quips de modules sans fil CET APPAREIL EST CONFORME AUX NORMES INTERNATIONALES EN MATIRE D'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONNEMENTS DE FRQUENCE RADIO. Le module sans fil intgr votre ordinateur est un metteur et rcepteur radio. Cet appareil est conu pour ne pas dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dfinies par des directives internationales (ICNIRP). Ces limites sont dfinies dans le cadre de directives qui tablissent les niveaux autoriss de rayonnements de frquence radio pour l'ensemble de la population. Ces directives, dictes par des organismes scientifiques indpendants, s'appuient sur une valuation rgulire et minutieuse de diffrentes tudes scientifiques. Cet appareil est galement conforme aux directives R&TTE europennes relatives la protection de la sant et de la scurit des personnes. La norme d'exposition dfinie pour les appareils mobiles utilise une unit de mesure appele SAR

(Specific Absorption Rate, taux d'absorption spcifique).* Ce taux a t obtenu via des tests au cours desquels les appareils ont effectu des transmissions au niveau de puissance certifi le plus lev, dans toutes les bandes de frquence. Le taux SAR rel de l'appareil en cours de fonctionnement peut tre bien infrieur la valeur maximale dfinie, dans la mesure o il fonctionne diffrents niveaux de puissance et utilise uniquement la puissance requise pour atteindre le rseau. Install dans l'ordinateur, cet appareil est conforme aux directives en matire d'exposition aux frquences radio lorsque les antennes se trouvent une distance minimale du corps. Pour transmettre des donnes ou des messages, l'appareil doit disposer d'une connexion de qualit au rseau. Dans certains cas, les transmissions de donnes ou de messages peuvent tre retardes jusqu' ce qu'une connexion soit disponible. Veillez respecter la distance conseille jusqu' la fin de la transmission. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 27

*Les directives internationales autres que celles de la FCC indiquent que la limite SAR pour les appareils mobiles utiliss par le grand public est de 2 watts/kilogramme (W/kg), calcul sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de masse tissulaire. Ces directives incluent une marge de scurit importante pour une protection accrue du grand public et pour tenir compte des variations dans les mesures. Les valeurs SAR peuvent varier selon les exigences locales en matire de reporting et selon la bande du rseau. Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive 1999/5/CE (annexe II) sur les quipements hertziens et quipements terminaux de tlcommunications et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts

(RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Un systme informatique compos de produits de marque HP est conforme aux exigences allemandes en matire d'ergonomie si tous les produits utiliss portent la marque d'homologation GS , par exemple l'ordinateur de bureau, le clavier, la souris et le moniteur. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Avis pour le Japon B VCCI-B 28 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 29 Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. Avis pour Tawan 30 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour viter tout risque de blessure associe la chaleur ou de surchauffe de l'ordinateur, ne placez pas ce dernier sur vos genoux et n'obstruez pas ses ouvertures d'aration. Utilisez toujours l'ordinateur sur une surface plane et rigide. La ventilation ne doit pas tre entrave par des lments rigides, tels qu'une imprimante, ni par des lments souples, tels que des coussins, du tissu ou un tapis pais. De mme, l'adaptateur secteur ne doit rester en contact ni avec la peau ni avec un lment souple, tel que des coussins, un vtement ou un tapis lorsque l'ordinateur est en cours de fonctionnement. L'ordinateur et l'adaptateur secteur sont conformes aux limites de temprature de surface accessible l'utilisateur, dfinies par la norme internationale sur la scurit du matriel informatique (CEI/EN 60950). Avis sur les risques lis la scurit Si vous observez l'une des situations suivantes (ou avez d'autres inquitudes en matire de scurit), n'utilisez pas l'ordinateur : bruit de crpitement, de sifflement ou de claquement ou forte odeur/fume en provenance de l'ordinateur. La survenue de l'une de ces situations est normale en cas de dfaillance d'un composant lectronique interne de manire neutralise et contrle. Cependant, ces situations peuvent galement indiquer un risque de scurit. Ne partez pas du principe qu'il s'agit d'une dfaillance neutralise. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension, dconnectez-le de sa source d'alimentation, puis contactez le support technique. Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur 31 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur AVERTISSEMENT !

batterie d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie ou de brlures, abstenez-vous de dmonter, d'craser, de perforer, de jeter dans l'eau ou dans le feu une batterie, ou encore de court-circuiter ses connecteurs externes. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne laissez pas les batteries la porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, n'utilisez que la batterie fournie avec l'ordinateur, une batterie de remplacement fournie par HP ou une batterie compatible achete comme accessoire auprs de HP. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT ! L'coute prolonge de musique un volume lev peut endommager votre acuit auditive. Pour rduire le risque de diminution de l'acuit auditive, baissez le volume un niveau modr et agrable et minimisez le temps d'coute des volumes levs. Pour votre scurit, rinitialisez toujours le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des couteurs. Le volume sonore de certains de ces appareils peut tre plus lev que d'autres, mme si le rglage est identique. Toute modification des paramtres audio ou d'galisation par dfaut peut entraner une augmentation du volume et doit tre effectue avec prcaution. Pour votre scurit, utilisez uniquement des casques ou des couteurs respectant les limites dfinies par la norme EN 50332-2. Si l'ordinateur comporte un casque ou des couteurs, cette combinaison respecte la norme EN 50332-1. 32 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques d'lectrocution ou de dtrioration du matriel :

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur facilement accessible. Coupez l'alimentation de l'ordinateur en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur

(plutt que de l'ordinateur). Si l'ordinateur portable est fourni avec une fiche tripolaire, branchez le cordon sur une prise lectrique tripolaire relie la terre. Ne dsactivez pas la broche de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation en utilisant, par exemple, un adaptateur bipolaire. La broche de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les problmes de scurit potentiels, n'utilisez avec cet ordinateur que l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'ordinateur, un adaptateur secteur de remplacement fourni par HP ou un adaptateur secteur achet comme accessoire auprs de HP. Nettoyage du clavier AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques d'lectrocution ou de dtrioration des composants internes, n'utilisez pas d'aspirateur pour nettoyer le clavier. Un aspirateur peut dposer de la poussire sur la surface du clavier. Nettoyez rgulirement le clavier pour viter que les touches ne deviennent collantes et pour liminer la poussire, les peluches et les particules qui risquent de se loger sous les touches. Utilisez une bombe dpoussirante air comprim avec embout directionnel permettant d'insuffler de l'air sous le clavier et autour des touches pour retirer les particules. Avis sur les dplacements AVERTISSEMENT ! Afin de rduire le risque de choc lectrique, d'incendie ou de dtrioration du matriel, n'essayez pas d'alimenter l'ordinateur au moyen d'un kit de conversion de tension destin aux quipements mnagers. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 33 Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude 2000m ou 2000 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales Norvge et Sude : notice de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ATTENTION : Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, utilisez un isolant voltaque lors de la connexion un systme de distribution par cble. 34 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Informations importantes relatives la scurit AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Afin d'viter tout risque de choc lectrique ou de dommages votre quipement :

Ne dsactivez pas la prise de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation. La prise de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise mise la terre facilement accessible. Coupez l'alimentation du client lger en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur. L'ordinateur peut tre trs lourd ; assurez-vous d'adopter une position ergonomique adquate lors de sa manipulation. Installez l'ordinateur proximit d'une prise secteur. Le cordon d'alimentation secteur constitue le principal dispositif de dconnexion secteur de votre ordinateur et doit donc tre facilement accessible. Pour votre scurit, le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec votre ordinateur est quip d'une broche de mise la terre. Utilisez toujours le cordon d'alimentation avec une prise murale correctement relie la terre, afin de rduire les risques d'lectrocution. Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique en provenance du rseau tlphonique, branchez votre ordinateur dans une prise secteur avant de le connecter une ligne tlphonique. Par ailleurs, dconnectez votre ligne tlphonique avant de dbrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur. Dbranchez le cordon du modem du rseau tlphonique avant d'installer ou d'enlever le capot de votre ordinateur. N'utilisez pas l'ordinateur lorsque le capot est enlev. Pour plus de scurit, dbranchez toujours l'ordinateur de sa source d'alimentation, de tout systme de tlcommunications (comme les lignes tlphoniques), des rseaux et des modems avant d'excuter toute opration de maintenance. Si vous ne respectez pas ces consignes, vous risquez de vous blesser ou de causer des dommages matriels. Le modem et l'alimentation de ce produit renferment des niveaux de tension dangereux. Informations importantes relatives la scurit 35 ATTENTION : Si votre ordinateur est quip d'un commutateur de slection de tension destin aux systmes fonctionnant sous 115 ou 230 V, ce commutateur a t prdfini sur la tension en vigueur dans le pays/rgion o il a t vendu initialement. Mettre le commutateur sur la mauvaise position peut endommager l'ordinateur et annuler toute garantie implicite. Ce produit n'a pas t valu pour une connexion un systme d'alimentation informatique (un systme de distribution de courant alternatif sans connexion directe la terre, selon la norme CEI/EN 60950). Conditions d'installation Consultez les instructions d'installation avant de brancher cet quipement l'alimentation. AVERTISSEMENT ! L'quipement doit tre pourvu d'un raccordement la terre protecteur secteur appropri. Cet ordinateur peut contenir des pices sous tension et amovibles. Dbranchez le cordon d'alimentation avant de retirer le botier. Remettez le botier bien en place avant de remettre l'ordinateur sous tension. Avis sur le remplacement de la batterie AVERTISSEMENT ! Le produit peut contenir une pile ou un module de batterie interne alcalin, au dioxyde de lithium manganse ou au pentoxyde de vanadium. Il y a danger d'incendie et de brlures s'il n'est pas manipul correctement. Pour rduire les risques de blessure :

N'essayez pas de recharger la batterie. vitez de la soumettre des tempratures suprieures 60 C (140 F). N'essayez pas de dmonter, d'craser, de percer la batterie, ni de court-circuiter ses bornes ou de la jeter dans le feu ou l'eau. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une batterie d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Remplacez uniquement par une batterie HP prvue pour ce produit. Pour plus d'informations sur le retrait d'une batterie, reportez-vous la documentation de l'ordinateur. Les piles, modules de batterie et accumulateurs ne doivent pas tre jets avec les ordures mnagres. Pour permettre leur recyclage ou leur mise au rebut, veuillez utiliser les systmes de collecte publique ou renvoyez-les HP, un partenaire HP agr ou leurs agents. Taiwan EPA demande aux fabricants ou aux importateurs de piles, conformment l'Article 15 de la loi relative la mise au rebut (Waste Disposal Act), d'indiquer les mentions de rcupration des piles usages dans des points de vente, brochures ou publicits. Contactez une entreprise de recyclage qualifie pour la mise au rebut approprie de la pile. 36 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT ! L'coute prolonge de musique un volume lev peut endommager votre acuit auditive. Pour rduire le risque de diminution de l'acuit auditive, baissez le volume un niveau modr et agrable et minimisez le temps d'coute des volumes levs. Pour votre scurit, rinitialisez toujours le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des couteurs. Le volume sonore de certains de ces appareils peut tre plus lev que d'autres, mme si le rglage est identique. Toute modification des paramtres audio ou d'galisation par dfaut peut entraner une augmentation du volume et doit tre effectue avec prcaution. Si l'ordinateur est quip d'un casque d'coute ou d'couteurs et qu'il porte le sigle GS , cette combinaison est en conformit avec la norme EN 50332-1. Pour votre propre scurit, les casques d'coute ou les couteurs utiliss avec ces produits doivent tre en conformit avec les limitations des casques de la norme EN 50332-2. Informations de scurit relatives au laser Pour les produits quips d'units optiques ou d'metteurs fibre optique. Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de stockage optique (c'est--dire un lecteur CD ou DVD) et/ou d'un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Ces lments comportent des lasers classs dans la catgorie des produits laser de classe 1, conformment la norme IEC/EN 60825-1, et sont conformes ses exigences. Chacun de ces produits laser est conforme aux rgulations 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 de la US FDA ou est conforme ces normes l'exception des diffrences conformment la notice des lasers No. 50, du 24 Juin 2007. AVERTISSEMENT ! L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation des appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de pice rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, autres que ceux indiqus dans le prsent manuel. Seuls les techniciens agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 Pour tre protg contre les courants de dfaut, l'quipement doit tre raccord une borne de terre. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur disposant d'une mise la terre raccorde la terre. Les cordons d'alimentation de remplacement ne fournissent pas une protection adquate contre les dfauts. Utilisez exclusivement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit ou un cordon de remplacement agr par Hewlett-Packard. Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs 37 Danemark For tilslutning af de vrige ledere, se medflgende installationsvejledning. Finlande Laite on liitettv suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Norvge Apparatet m kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Sude Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag, nr den ansluts till ett ntverk. Exigences relatives l'alimentation Les alimentations sur certains produits sont quipes de commutateurs de tension externes. La fonction de slection de tension sur le produit autorise son fonctionnement sous toute tension comprise entre 100-127 ou 200-240 volts secteur. Les alimentations sur les produits dpourvus de commutateurs de tension externes sont quipes de circuits internes qui dtectent la tension d'entre et basculent automatiquement sur la tension approprie. Pour des raisons de scurit, n'utilisez que l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'quipement ou un adaptateur de remplacement autoris par Hewlett-Packard. Les rfrences de remplacement sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Pour une utilisation en Norvge Ce produit est galement conu pour un systme lectrique informatique avec tension phase-phase de 230 V. 38 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Cordons d'alimentation requis Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit est conforme aux rglementations en vigueur dans le pays o le matriel a t achet l'origine. N'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'quipement ou un cordon d'alimentation de remplacement de Hewlett-Packard ou d'une source HP agre. Les rfrences de remplacement sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/

hpsupport/index.pl. Les cordons d'alimentation destins tre utiliss dans d'autres pays doivent respecter les normes du pays o vous utilisez le produit. Pour plus d'informations sur les exigences de cordon d'alimentation, contactez votre revendeur, votre mainteneur ou votre fournisseur de services agr HP. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas de cordons d'alimentation d'autres produits. Un mauvais cordon d'alimentation peut entraner un risque de dcharge lectrique ou d'incendie. Les exigences prsentes ci-aprs s'appliquent tous les pays. 1. 2. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre homologu par une agence accrdite, responsable de l'valuation dans le pays o le cordon sera install. La longueur du cordon doit tre comprise entre 1,8 m (6 pieds) and 3,6 m (12 pieds). Pour un cordon d'alimentation de 2 m (6,56 pieds) ou moins, le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 0,75 mm2 ou 18 AWG. Si le cordon d'alimentation dpasse 2 m (6,56 pieds), le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 1 mm2 ou 16 AWG. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre branch un endroit dgag o il ne risque pas d'tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise murale et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas ce produit avec un cordon d'alimentation endommag. Si le cordon d'alimentation est endommag de quelque manire que ce soit, remplacez-le immdiatement. Un cordon endommag peut entraner des risques de blessure. Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon Pour une utilisation au Japon, utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'appareil. ATTENTION : N'utilisez pas le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit pour alimenter d'autres appareils. Risque de pincement AVERTISSEMENT ! Observez les zones risque de pincement. N'approchez pas vos doigts des pices se refermant. Risque de pincement 39 Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude 2000m ou 2000 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales 40 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne Le niveau de pression acoustique (LpA) est nettement en dessous de 70 dB(A) (position oprateur, fonctionnement normal, selon ISO 7779). Les donnes d'mission de bruit acoustique sont disponibles dans les dclarations IT ECO relatives au produit, l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne 41 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Ce chapitre prsente des avis relatifs l'environnement des diffrents pays ou rgions et des informations de conformit. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie HP encourage ses clients recycler l'quipement lectronique usag, les cartouches d'impression HP d'origine et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP : http://www.hp.com/recycle. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits conformment aux dispositions lgales telles que REACH (rglement CE numro 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Un rapport d'informations sur la conformit des substances chimiques de ce produit est disponible l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/reach. 42 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

( http://www. sepa.gov.cn) Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) Tableau des substances/composants toxiques et dangereux et leur contenu conformment aux mthodes de gestion du contrle de la pollution par les produits d'informations lectroniques de Chine Substances et composants toxiques et dangereux Nom de la pice Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Batterie Cbles Camra Chssis/Autre Lecteur de carte mmoire flash Lecteur de disquette Disque dur Casque Cartes PCA d'entre/

sortie Clavier cran LCD X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine 43 Substances et composants toxiques et dangereux Nom de la pice Support (CD/DVD/

disquette) Mmoire Carte mre, processeur, dissipateurs thermiques Souris Unit de disque optique Priphrique d'amarrage en option Adaptateur d'alimentation Source d'alimentation Tlcommande Lecteur de carte Smart Card/Java Haut-parleurs externes Tuner TV Unit mmoire flash USB Concentrateur USB Webcam Rcepteur sans fil Cartes sans fil Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O : Indique que la quantit de substance toxique ou dangereuse contenue dans tous les matriaux homognes de cette pice se situe en dessous de la limite fixe par la norme SJ/T11363-2006. X : Indique que cette substance toxique ou dangereuse contenue dans au moins un matriel homogne utilis dans ce composant est au-dessus de la limite dans SJ/T11363-2006. Tous les lments du tableau accompagns d'un X sont conformes la directive europenne 2002/95/EC du 27 janvier 2003, dite RoHS (Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'environnement relative aux dchets d'quipements lectriques et lectroniques) et ses amendements. REMARQUE : La dure d'utilisation cologique en anne, en rfrence, a t dtermine sur la base de conditions normales d'utilisation du produit, telles que la temprature et l'humidit. 44 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB) (PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T11363-2006 X SJ/T11363-2006 X RoHS 2003 1 27 2002/95/EC

:

Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) 45 Dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon Une norme japonaise, dfinie par la spcification JIS C 0950, 2008, oblige les fabricants fournir des dclarations de contenu de matriel pour certaines catgories de produits lectroniques proposes la vente aprs le 1 juillet 2006. Pour afficher la dclaration de matriel JIS C 0950 de ce produit, rendez-vous sur le site Web HP : http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie Ce produit a t tiquet conformment la loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie exigeant la divulgation de la consommation nergtique en utilisation normale (mode inactif) et en mode veille. Votre produit correspond l'une des nombreuses configurations de cette famille de modle ; la consommation nergtique du mode inactif de votre configuration spcifique peut tre diffrente des informations figurant sur l'tiquette. La consommation nergtique relle de votre produit peut tre suprieure ou infrieure la valeur signale sur l'tiquette de l'nergie du produit au Mexique en raison de facteurs tels que la configuration (composants et modules choisis) et de l'utilisation (tches ralises, logiciels installs et excuts, etc.). Rglementation EEE de la Turquie En conformit avec la rglementation EEE EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine L'quipement est conforme aux exigences relatives aux rglementations techniques, approuves par la rsolution du Cabinet des ministres de l'Ukraine date du 3 dcembre 2008 1057, en termes de restrictions quant l'utilisation de certaines substances dangereuses dans les quipements lectroniques et lectriques.

, 3 2008 1057. Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire Voir http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel ou la pile bouton de ce produit est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. 46 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries Hewlett-Packard encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, les cartouches d'impression de marque HP et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour obtenir des informations concernant le recyclage du produit au Japon, reportez-vous http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Conformit ENERGY STAR (certains modles) REMARQUE : Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo Energy Star. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, Hewlett-Packard Company a suivi pour le produit le processus de qualification et de certification renforc labor de l'agence amricaine pour la protection de l'environnement afin de s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR sont agrs ENERGY STAR conformment aux lignes directrices d'ENERGY STAR en matire d'utilisation efficace de l'nergie. Le logo suivant est prsent sur tous les ordinateurs qualifis ENERGY STAR. Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries 47 Le programme ENERGY STAR pour ordinateurs a t cr par l'EPA pour promouvoir l'conomie d'nergie et rduire la pollution de l'air grce des quipements plus conergtiques au sein des maisons, bureaux et usines. Une des faons de rendre les produits plus efficaces sur le plan nergtique consiste rduire la consommation lorsqu'elle n'est pas gre par la fonction Gestion de l'alimentation de Microsoft Windows. La fonction de gestion de l'alimentation permet la mise en veille de l'ordinateur aprs une priode d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. Lorsqu'elle est utilise avec un moniteur ENERGY STAR, cette fonction prend galement en charge les fonctions similaires de gestion de l'alimentation du moniteur externe. Afin de bnficier de cette conomie d'nergie, la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation a t prdfinie pour une mise en veille de l'ordinateur et du moniteur aprs une certaine priode d'inactivit :

Ordinateur Moniteur/cran intgr Ordinateurs de bureau et postes de travail Aprs 30 minutes Aprs 15 minutes Clients lgers et ordinateurs de bureau Sans objet Aprs 15 minutes Il suffit que l'utilisateur se serve d'un des priphriques d'entre de l'ordinateur (ex. : souris, clavier, etc.) pour que l'ordinateur et l'cran quittent le mode veille et se rallument. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN d'veil par appel rseau est active, il est galement possible de rallumer l'ordinateur l'aide d'un signal rseau. Pour plus d'informations sur le potentiel d'conomie nergtique et financire de la fonction Gestion de l'alimentation, reportez-vous au site Web consacr la gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR de l'EPA : http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Pour plus d'informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses bienfaits sur l'environnement, reportez-vous au site Web ENERGY STAR de l'EPA : http://www.energystar.gov. ATTENTION : L'utilisation de la fonction d'conomie d'nergie du moniteur avec des moniteurs qui ne sont pas qualifis ENERGY STAR peut entraner une distorsion de l'image en cas de fermeture automatique pour conomie d'nergie. REMARQUE : ENERGY STAR n'est pas pris en charge sur les ordinateurs de bureau et les postes de travail configurs avec certaines versions de Linux ou FreeDOS. En cas de restauration du systme d'exploitation, vous devrez galement redfinir les paramtres ENERGY STAR (le cas chant) une fois la restauration effectue. Sous Windows 7, pour contrler les paramtres d'alimentation par dfaut de votre ordinateur de bureau ou station de travail, slectionnez Dmarrer > Panneau de configuration, puis tapez Options d'alimentation dans la fentre de recherche. 48 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Sous Windows 8, pour contrler les paramtres d'alimentation par dfaut de votre ordinateur de bureau ou station de travail, tapez alimentation dans l'cran d'accueil, slectionnez Paramtres, puis slectionnez Options d'alimentation dans la liste des applications. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits, conformment aux normes juridiques en vigueur telles que le rglement concernant l'enregistrement, l'valuation et l'autorisation des substances chimiques, ainsi que les restrictions applicables ces substances (REACH, rglement CE N 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ce produit sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Avis sur le mercure Ce produit HP peut contenir les matriaux suivants qui requirent un traitement spcial la fin de leur cycle de vie :

Le mercure contenu dans la lampe fluorescente de l'cran cristaux liquides (LCD) Il se peut que l'limination du mercure soit rglemente en raison de considrations environnementales. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'limination et le traitement de cette substance, veuillez contacter les autorits locales concernes ou l'Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. Reportez-

vous au site http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) Substances chimiques 49

I/O PCAs

O: SJ/T11363-2006

X: SJ/T11363-2006

XRoHS 20031272002/95/EC

The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 50 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Tableau 6-1 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink X Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. REMARQUE : The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. Dclarations IT ECO Ordinateurs de bureau et clients lgers http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Stations de travail http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Dclarations IT ECO 51 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal

(modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). REMARQUE : Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). REMARQUE : Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Rglementation EEE de la Turquie Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur 52 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine)

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine) 53 Index A avis utilisation en vol 12 voyage 33 avis sur la mise au rebut des quipements 42 avis, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail avis sur la scurit des lasers 13 avis sur le niveau du volume, FCC (Federal Communications casque et couteurs 32 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 11 batterie 12, 46 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 32 Brsil 5 Canada 5 clavier 33 cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon 18 cordons d'alimentation 18, 33 Core du Sud 10 environnement 42 ergonomie 8, 28 Japon 9 Macrovision Corporation 19 matriau compos de perchlorate 46 Mexique 10 mise au rebut des quipements 42 modem 14 niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 32 restriction d'utilisation de Commission) 24 avis, ordinateurs portables FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 3 avis, restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine 43, 49 avis, restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour le Japon 52 avis de certification GS 8, 28 avis de restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 46 avis pour l'Union europenne 6, 26 avis pour la Core du Sud 10 avis pour le Brsil 5 avis pour le Canada 5 avis pour le Japon 9 avis pour Macrovision Corporation 19 substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 46 avis relatif au clavier 33 avis relatif aux appareils sans fil restriction d'utilisation de pour le Mexique 10 substances dangereuses pour la Chine 43, 49 avis sur l'altitude 34, 40 avis sur l'environnement pour la restriction d'utilisation de Chine 43 substances dangereuses pour le Japon 52 avis sur l'ergonomie 8, 28 avis sur la mise au rebut scurit des lasers 13 Singapour 11 Tawan 11 Union europenne 6, 26 batterie 46 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 12 quipement 42 avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 32 avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour 11 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 11 avis sur les conditions d'utilisation 42 avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 18, 33 avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon 18 avis sur les dplacements 33 avis sur les modems 14 Canada 17 Japon 17 Nouvelle-Zlande 17 systme amricain 14 avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande 17 avis sur les modems pour le avis sur les modems pour le Canada 17 Japon 17 avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis 14 avis sur les utilisations en vol 12 avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales 34, 40 avis tawanais 11 B batterie, avis 12, 32, 46 54 Index C conformit ENERGY STAR 12 D dclaration de conformit ordinateurs portables 4 dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon 46 F FCC (Federal Communications Commission) avis sur les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 avis sur les ordinateurs portables 3 cble des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 cbles pour ordinateurs portables 3 modifications apportes aux ordinateurs portables 3 modifications des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 L loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie 46 M matriel lectronique et de la batterie, recyclage 42 modifications, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 24 N notice de mise la terre des cbles 34 notices restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 53 O ordinateurs portables, modifications FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 3 P priphrique matriel, identification 1 priphriques de rseau local sans fil 25 priphriques LAN sans fil 26 priphriques WLAN 4 R recyclage de la batterie 42 recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie 42 restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 53 S support vocal 18 T tuner TV, notice de mise la terre des cbles 34 Index 55

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement WARNING: The radiated output power of the Dell Wireless WLAN Card devices is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the Dell Wireless WLAN Card devices should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20 cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity) and the antenna that is built into the end-product. To determine the location of the antenna within your end-product, check the information posted on the general Dell support site at http://support.dell.com. This device has also been evaluated for and shown compliant with the FCC RF exposure limits under portable exposure conditions (antennas are within 20 cm of a person's body) when installed in certain specific OEM configurations. Details of the authorized configurations can be found at FCC Equipment Authorization Search website https://apps.fcc.gov/oetcf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm by entering the FCC ID number on the device. Interference Statement This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction manual, may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) This device may not cause harmful interference. 2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Notice: The FCC regulations provide that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Dell Inc. could void your authority to operate this equipment. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference with radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient the receiving antenna. Relocate the system with respect to the receiver. Move the system away from the receiver. Plug the system into a different outlet so that the system and the receiver are on different branch circuits. If necessary, consult a representative of Dell Inc. or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. NOTE: This Dell Wireless WLAN Card must be installed and used in strict accordance with the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. Modifications not expressly approved by Dell could void your authority to operate the equipment. instructions as described the manufacturer's in This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Notice for 5GHz only:

Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted for indoor usage only.

Safety and Regulatory Information Informations sur les rglementations et la scurit Informaes de segurana e regulamentao Gvenlik ve Yasal Dzenleme Bilgileri CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Safety and Regulatory Information You can find additional Safety Best Practices and information on REACH, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Ergonomics, Transportation, and Tuners on the Regulatory Compliance page, www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. WARNING: Use of controls, adjustments, procedures, connections, or signal types other than those specified in your documentation may result in exposure to shock, electrical hazards, and/or mechanical hazards. CAUTION: Dell products are not certified as medical electrical equipment, and are not intended for use in close proximity to patients or in oxygen rich environments. Dell products are not designed for use in hazardous environments. Dell products are not designed or intended for use in operating or calibrating medical devices. WARNING: Do not operate your equipment with any cover(s) (including computer covers, bezels, filler brackets, front-panel inserts, and so on) removed. Do not use your equipment in a wet environment. Protectequipment from liquid intrusion. Do not use damaged equipment, including exposed, frayed, or damaged power cords. Do not push any objects into the air vents or openings of your equipment. Doing so can cause fire or electric shock by shorting out interior components. Do not allow your portable computer or adapter to operate with the base resting directly on exposed skin for extended periods of time. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation, particularly when ACpower is present. Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or burn. To remove a portable computer from all power sources, turn the computer off, disconnect the ACadapter from the electrical outlet, and remove any battery installed in the battery bay or module bay. When Working Inside Your Device WARNING: Hazardous moving parts. Keep away from the moving fan blades. Do not attempt to service the equipment yourself, except as explained in your Dell documentation or in instructions otherwise provided to you by Dell. Always follow installation and service instructions closely. Internal components may become very hot during normal operation. Before touching any internal components, allowtime for them to cool. Disconnect all cables from the portable computer including the phone cable before opening the memory/modem access door. Check the voltage rating before you connect the equipment to an electrical outlet to ensure that the required voltage and frequency match the available power source. If your device has a manual voltage-selection switch, your voltage-selection switch on the back panel must be manually set to operate at the correct operating voltage used in your location. To prevent electric shock, plug the equipment power cables into properly grounded electrical outlets, and use only the approved power cables rated for the equipment. For 3 pin plugs, do not use adapter plugs without the ground pin or remove the ground pin from the plug. Adapter Safety Use only the Dell-provided AC adapter approved for use with this device. Use of another AC adapter may cause a fire or explosion. The AC adapter may become hot during normal operation of your computer. Ensure adequate ventilation and use care when handling the adapter during or immediately after operation. Do not use an auto adapter DC power cable connected via either an automobile cigarette lighter adapter or an empower-type connector in vehicles with high voltage (24 VDC), such as commercial transport vehicles. Battery Safety WARNING: Using an incompatible battery or a third-party battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a battery purchased from Dell that is designed to work with your Dell computer. Do not use a battery from other computers with yourcomputer. A damaged battery may pose a risk of personal injury. Damage may include impact or shock that dents or punctures the battery, exposure to a flame, or other deformation. Do not disassemble the battery. Handle a damaged or leaking battery pack with extreme care. If the battery is damaged, electrolyte may leak from the cells or fire may result which may cause personal injury. Recycling Information Dell recommends that customers dispose of their used computer hardware, monitors, printers, and other peripherals in an environmentally-sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products, components,and/or materials. For specific information on Dells worldwide recycling programs, see dell.com/recycle. Location of Radio Regulatory Labels For some portable computers, the radio regulatory labels may be found either in the battery compartment, or under the bottom access panel. Ergonomic Instructions WARNING: Improper or prolonged keyboard use may result in injury. WARNING: Viewing a display or external monitor screen for extended periods of time may result in eye strain. WARNING: Excessive sound pressure from earphones or headphones can cause hearing damage or loss. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to settings other than the center position may increase the earphones or headphones output voltage, and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the earphones or headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver, etc.) may increase the earphones or headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of earphones or headphones other than those specified by the manufacturer may lead to heightened sound pressure level. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (for example: direct sun light) reflections may occur which result in reduced readability. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive In the European Union, this label indicates that this product should not be disposed of with household waste. It should be deposited at an appropriate facility to enable recovery and recycling. For information on how to recycle this product in your country, please visit: www.euro.dell.com/recycling. Battery Disposal In the European Union, this label indicates that the batteries in this product should be collected separately and not be disposed of with household waste. Substances in batteries can have a potential negative impact on health and environment and you have a role in recycling waste batteries, thus contributing to the protection, preservation, and improvement of the quality of the environment. You should contact your local authority or retailer for details of the collection and recycling schemes available. Alternatively, please visit:

www.euro.dell.com/recycling. Registration, Evaluation, and Authorization of Chemicals(REACH) REACH is the European Union (EU) chemical substances regulatory framework. Information on substances of very high concern contained in Dell products in a concentration above 0.1 % weight by weight (w/w) can be found at www.Dell.com/REACH. Regulatory Notices For Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), see www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. For Products With Wireless LAN / 802.11 Interfaces Products that fall into this category are denoted by inclusion of the Class 2 identifier symbol (exclamation mark in a circle) accompanying the CE Mark on the product or radio regulatory label, or on the 802.11 plug-in card, example below:

NOTE: The Notified Body number denoted by NBnr will only be present when required and has no bearing on the usage restriction whether present or not. Display Lamp Disposal Lamps inside this product contain mercury (Hg) and must be recycled or disposed of according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, contact the electronic industries alliance at www.eiae.org. For lamp-specific disposal information check www.lamprecycle.org. European Union Abbreviated R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Statement Hereby, Dell Inc. declares that all CE Marked Dell products incorporating Radio and Telecoms Terminal Equipment functionality are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the full format Declaration of Conformity may be obtained upon request from:

Dell Inc. One Dell Way Mailstop: PS4-30 Round Rock, Texas USA 78682 OR By sending an e-mail to Regulatory_Compliance@Dell.com Please include the marketing name, regulatory model, and regulatory type within the request. PRCAUTION: une PRCAUTION indique un risque dendommagement du matriel ou de perte de donnes, si les consignes ne sont pas respectes. AVERTISSEMENT: un AVERTISSEMENT indique un risque dendommagement du matriel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. Informations sur les rglementations et la scurit Vous trouverez des informations supplmentaires sur les Meilleures pratiques de scurit et REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization of Chemicals - Enregistrement, valuation, autorisation des produits chimiques), la Compatibilit lectromagntique (EMC), lErgonomie, le Transport et les Tuners sur la page Conformit aux rglementations, ladresse www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. AVERTISSEMENT: lutilisation de commandes, rglages, procdures, connexions ou types de signaux autres que ceux indiqus dans la documentation peut entraner des risques dlectrocution et de dommages mcaniques. PRCAUTION: les produits Dell ne sont pas certifis en tant ququipement lectrique mdical et ne sont pas conus pour une utilisation proximit de patients ou dans des environnements riches en oxygne. Les produits Dell ne sont pas conus pour une utilisation dans des environnements dangereux. Les produits Dell ne sont pas conus pour une utilisation lors du calibrage dappareils mdicaux ou en conjonction avec lutilisation de tels appareils. AVERTISSEMENT: ne faites pas fonctionner votre ordinateur lorsquun capot est retir (notamment les capots de lordinateur, les cadres, les languettes mtalliques, lescaches du panneau avant, etc...). Nutilisez pas lquipement dans un environnement humide. Protgez lquipement contre les infiltrations de liquide. Nutilisez pas un quipement endommag, notamment avec un cordon dalimentation dnud, effiloch ou endommag. Nintroduisez pas dobjets dans les entres dair ou autres ouvertures de votre appareil. Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou un choc lectrique d un court-circuit des composants internes. vitez de poser votre ordinateur portable ou votre adaptateur en fonctionnement sur vos genoux, mme la peau, pendant une priode prolonge. La temprature de la surface de la base augmente pendant le fonctionnement normal de lordinateur (notamment sil est aliment par le secteur). Le contact prolong avec la peau peut causer inconfort ou brlure. Pour mettre un ordinateur portable totalement hors tension, teignez-le, dbranchez ladaptateur secteur de la prise lectrique et retirez toutes les batteries installes dans la baie de la batterie ou la baie modulaire. Intervention sur votre appareil AVERTISSEMENT: pices mobiles dangereuses. Tenez-vous lcart des pales de ventilateur en mouvement. Ne tentez pas de dpanner lappareil par vous-mme, except si cela est indiqu dans votre documentation Dell ou dans des instructions qui vous ont t fournies dune autre manire par Dell. Suivez toujours de prs les instructions dinstallation et dentretien. Les composants internes peuvent surchauffer en fonctionnement normal. Avant de toucher des composants internes, laissez-les refroidir. Dbranchez tous les cbles de lordinateur portable, y compris le cble tlphonique, avant douvrir le cache daccs la mmoire/au modem. Vrifiez la tension nominale avant de raccorder lappareil une prise lectrique, afin de vous assurer que la tension et la frquence requises sont compatibles avec la source dalimentation lectrique disponible. Si votre appareil est quip dun interrupteur de slection manuelle de la tension, vous devez vous assurer que linterrupteur de slection manuelle de la tension situ sur le panneau arrire est configur de sorte fonctionner la tension approprie lendroit o vous vous trouvez. Pour prvenir tout choc lectrique, branchez les cbles dalimentation de lquipement dans des prises lectriques correctement mises la masse et nutilisez que des cbles dalimentation approuvs dont lintensit nominale est approprie lquipement. Dans le cas des prises 3 broches, nutilisez pas de prise dadaptation sans broche de mise la masse et ne retirez pas de la prise la broche de mise la masse. Mesures de scurit relatives ladaptateur CA Nutilisez que ladaptateur secteur fourni par Dell et homologu pour cet appareil. Lutilisation dun autre adaptateur secteur peut provoquer un incendie ou une explosion. Ladaptateur secteur peut tre chaud lorsque vous utilisez votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que la ventilation est adquate et prenez des prcautions lors de la manipulation de ladaptateur au cours de son fonctionnement ou immdiatement aprs. Nutilisez pas le cble dalimentation en CC dun adaptateur de voiture raccord via un adaptateur dallume-cigare dautomobile ou un connecteur de type empower dans des vhicules avec une tension leve (24VCC), comme des vhicules de transport commercial. Scurit relative la batterie AVERTISSEMENT: lutilisation dune batterie incompatible ou de tiers peut accrotre les risques dincendie ou dexplosion. Remplacez la batterie uniquement par une batterie achete auprs de Dell, conue pour fonctionner avec votre ordinateur Dell. Nutilisez pas de batteries provenant dautres ordinateurs. Une batterie endommage peut prsenter un risque de blessures corporelles. La batterie peut tre endommage en cas dimpact ou de choc, dexposition une flamme ou de soumission une dformation. Ne dmontez pas la batterie. Manipulez les batteries endommages ou perces avec une extrme prcaution. Si la batterie est endommage, llectrolyte peut fuir des lments ou un incendie se dclarer et provoquer des blessures corporelles. Emplacement des tiquettes de conformit aux normes de radio For some portable computers, Les tiquettes de conformit aux normes radio peuvent se trouver dans le compartiment de batterie ou sous le panneau daccs infrieur de certains ordinateurs. Informations sur le recyclage Dell recommande ses clients de mettre au rebut leurs matriel informatique, moniteurs, imprimantes et autres priphriques dans le respect de lenvironnement. Les mthodes possibles incluent la rutilisation de pices ou de produits entiers et le recyclage des produits, composants, et/ou matriels. Pour obtenir des informations particulires sur les programmes de recyclage mondial de Dell, rendez-vous sur le site dell.com/recycle. Conseils relatifs lergonomie AVERTISSEMENT: une utilisation incorrecte ou prolonge du clavier peut provoquer des blessures. AVERTISSEMENT: lutilisation prolonge dun affichage ou de lcran dun moniteur externe peut engendrer une fatigue oculaire. AVERTISSEMENT: une pression sonore excessive cre par des couteurs ou un casque peut engendrer une perte de loue ou endommager celle-ci. Un rglage du volume et de lgaliseur sur des paramtres autres que centraux peut accrotre la tension de sortie du volume et de lgaliseur, et ainsi la pression sonore. Lutilisation de facteurs affectant la sortie des couteurs ou du casque autres que ceux indiqus par le fabricant (par exemple systme dexploitation, logiciel de lgaliseur, micrologiciel, pilote, etc.) peut accrotre la tension de sortie du volume et de lgaliseur, et ainsi la pression sonore. Lutilisation dcouteurs ou dun casque autres que ceux indiqus par le fabricant peut accrotre la pression sonore. Lors de lutilisation dappareils mobiles dans des conditions dclairage dsavantageuses (par exemple en plein soleil), ilpeut se produire des rflexions qui rduisent la lisibilit. Directive WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment - Mise au rebut des quipements lectriques et lectroniques) En Union europenne, cette tiquette indique que ce produit ne doit pas tre jet avec les dchets mnagers. Il doit tre dpos un site de rcupration et de recyclage. Pour savoir comment recycler ce produit dans votre pays, veuillez vous rendre sur:

www.euro.dell.com/recycling. Mise au rebut de la batterie Dans lUnion europenne, cette tiquette indique que les batteries de ce produit doivent tre collectes et mises au rebut sparment des dchets mnagers ordinaires. Les substances que contiennent ces batteries peuvent avoir un effet ngatif surla sant et lenvironnement. Il est donc important de participer au recyclage des batteries usages et de contribuer ainsi la protection, la prservation et lamlioration de lenvironnement. Contactez les autorits locales ou votre revendeur pour obtenir des informations sur les procdures de ramassage et de mise au rebut disponibles dans votre rgion. Vous pouvez galement vous rendre sur:

www.euro.dell.com/recycling. REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization of Chemicals - Enregistrement, valuation, autorisation des produits chimiques) REACH est le programme de rglementation des produits chimiques dans lUnion europenne (UE). Vous trouverez des informations sur les substance trs proccupantes que contiennent les produits Dell en concentration suprieure 0,1 % en poids (m/m) sur www.Dell.com/REACH. Rglementations Pour en savoir plus sur la Compatibilit lectromagntique

(EMC), voir www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Produits dots dune interface LAN / 802.11 sans fil Les produits de cette catgorie sont identifis par le symbole Class 2 (point dexclamation dans un cercle) accompagnant la marque CE sur ltiquette rglementaire des produits ou sur la carte complmentaire 802.11 ; voustrouverez un exemple ci-dessous:

REMARQUE: le numro de corps notifi, indiqu par NBnr ne sera prsent que lorsque ncessaire et na aucun impact sur la restriction dutilisation, quil soit rsent ou non. Union europenne Dclaration de conformit abrge la Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE Par la prsente, Dell Inc. dclare que tous les produits Dell portant la marque CE et incorporant une fonctionnalit dquipement terminal de radio et tlcommunications sont conformes aux exigences essentielles et autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. Pour obtenir une copie intgrale de la Dclaration de conformit, adressez-vous :

Dell Inc. One Dell Way Mailstop: PS4-30 Round Rock, Texas USA 78682 ou envoyez un e-mail Regulatory_Compliance@Dell.com Veuillez inclure votre demande le nom commercial, lemodle rglementaire et le type rglementaire. AVISO: Um AVISO indica potenciais danos no hardwareou a perda de dados, caso as instrues nosejam seguidas. ADVERTNCIA: Uma ADVERTNCIA indica potenciaisdanos no equipamento, leses corporais oumesmo morte. Informaes de segurana e regulamentao Pode encontrar os melhores procedimentos de segurana e informaes sobre o REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals (Registo, avaliao, autorizao e restrio de substncias qumicas) , compatibilidade electromagntica, ergonomia, transporte e sintonizadores na pgina de conformidade de regulamentos em, www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. ADVERTNCIA: A actualizao de controlos, ajustes, procedimentos, ligaes ou de tipos de sinais para alm daqueles especificados na documentao poderesultar em choques elctricos, electrocusso e/ou ferimentos. AVISO: Os produtos Dell no so certificados como equipamento mdico elctrico, e no so projectados para utilizao em proximidade imediata a pacientes ou em ambientes rico em oxignio. Os produtos Dell no so projectados para utilizao emambientes que ofeream perigo. Os produtos Dell no so projectados e nem se destinam utilizao na operao ou calibrao de dispositivos mdicos. ADVERTNCIA: No utilize o computador quando a(s) tampa(s) estiver(em) removida(s) (inclusive tampas do computador, molduras, inseres do painel frontal, etc.) No utilize o seu equipamento num ambiente molhado. Proteja o equipamento contra a entrada de lquidos. No use equipamento danificado, incluindo fios elctricos expostos, esfiados ou danificados. No introduza objectos nas aberturas de ventilao ou em qualquer outra abertura do computador. Esse procedimento pode provocar incndio ou choque elctrico por curto-circuito de componentes internos. No deixe o computador porttil ligado com a base apoiada directamente sobre a pele por longos perodos de tempo. A temperatura da base aumentar durante o funcionamento normal (principalmente quando o computador estiver a ser alimentado por CA). O contacto contnuo com a pele exposta pode provocar desconforto ou, eventualmente, queimaduras. Para retirar um computador porttil de todas as fontes de alimentao de energia, desligue o computador, desligue o adaptador CA da tomada elctrica, e retire todas as baterias instaladas no compartimento de bateria ou no compartimento do mdulo. Ao efectuar alteraes dentro do seu computador ADVERTNCIA: Peas perigosas em movimento. Mantenha-se afastado das ps em movimento daventoinha. No tente efectuar a manuteno do seu equipamento, excepto conforme indicado na documentao ou outras instrues fornecidas pela Dell. Siga atentamente as instrues de instalao e de servio. Os componentes internos podem estar quentes durante o funcionamento normal. Aguarde para que os componentes internos arrefeam antes de toc-los. Desligue todos os cabos do computador porttil incluindo o cabo do telefone antes de abrir a porta de acesso memria/modem. Verifique a tenso do adaptador CA antes de ligar o seu equipamento a uma tomada elctrica, certificando-se de que a tenso e frequncia obrigatrias esto de acordo com a fonte de energia disponvel. Se o dispositivo tiver uma chave de seleco de tenso manual, esta chave, localizada no painel traseiro, precisa ser configurada manualmente para a tenso de utilizao correcta utilizada na sua rea. Para evitar o risco de choques elctricos, ligue os cabos de alimentao do computador s tomadas elctricas da parede adequadamente ligadas terra, e utilize apenas os cabos de alimentao com especificaes adequadas para o equipamento. Para fichas de 3 pinos, no use fichas adaptadoras com o pino terra ou remova o pino terra da ficha. Segurana do adaptador Utilize somente o adaptador CA fornecido pela Dell aprovado para uso com este dispositivo. A utilizao de um outro tipo de adaptador CA pode provocar incndio ou exploso. O adaptador CA pode aquecer durante o normal funcionamento do computador. Verifique se h ventilao adequada e tenha cuidado ao manusear o adaptador durante ou imediatamente aps o seu funcionamento. Noutilize adaptadores de alimentao CC para automveis ligados ao isqueiro ou ligados atravs de uma ficha do tipo empower em veculos de alta tenso (24VCC), tais como os veculos de transportes comerciais. Segurana da bateria ADVERTNCIA: utilizao de uma bateria incompatvel ou de uma bateria de terceiros pode aumentar o risco de incndio ou de exploso. Substitua a bateria apenas por uma bateria adquirida da Dell que concebida para funcionar com o seu computador Dell. No use baterias de outros computadores neste computador. Uma bateria danificada poder provocar um risco de ferimento pessoal. Os danos podero incluir impacto ou choque que danifique ou fure a bateria, exposio s chamas ou outra deformao. No desmonte a bateria. Se a bateria estiver danificada ou apresentar fugas, manuseie-a com o mximo cuidado. Se a bateria estiver danificada, poder haver fugas do electrlito das clulas ou incndio, podendo provocar ferimentos pessoais. Informao de reciclagem A Dell recomenda que os clientes procedam eliminao de hardware do computador, monitores, impressoras e outros perifricos de uma forma ecolgica. Alguns mtodos correctos so a reutilizao de peas ou de produtos inteiros e a reciclagem de produtos, componentes e/ou materiais. Para obter informaes sobre os programas de reciclagem da Dell em todo o mundo, consulte dell.com/recycle. Location of Radio Regulatory Labels For some portable computers, the radio regulatory labels may be found either in the battery compartment, or under the bottom access panel. Instrues ergonmicas ADVERTNCIA: A utilizao imprpria ou prolongada do teclado pode causar leses. ADVERTNCIA: Olhar para um ecr ou monitor externo durante perodos prolongados de tempo pode resultar em tenso ocular. ADVERTNCIA: A presso excessiva de som causada pelos auriculares ou auscultadores pode dar origem a danos ou perda de audio. Se o ajuste do controlo de volume e tambm do equalizador no for deixado na posio central, podero ocorrer aumentos de tenso de sada nos auscultadores ou auriculares, econsequentemente o aumento do nvel de presso de som. A utilizao de recursos que alteram a sada de som dos auscultadores ou dos auriculares para valores alm daqueles especificados pelo fabricante

(por exemplo o sistema operativo, software de equalizador, firmware, controlador, etc.) pode aumentar a tenso de sada dos auscultadores ou dos auriculares e consequentemente o nvel de presso do som. A utilizao de auscultadores ou auriculares para alm dos especificados pelo fabricante pode levar a um nvel de presso de som elevado. Durante a utilizao mvel em condies de iluminao desvantajosas (por exemplo: luz solar directa) pode haver reflexos que resultaro numa capacidade reduzida de leitura. Directiva WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Na Unio Europeia, esta etiqueta indica que esse produto no deve ser eliminado juntamente com o lixo normal. Deve ser depositado numa instalao apropriada para recolha e reciclagem. Para informao em como reciclar este produto no seu pas, por favor visite www.euro.dell.com/recycling. Eliminao de baterias Na Unio Europeia, este rtulo indica que as baterias deste produto devem ser recolhidas separadamente e no devem ser eliminadas com o lixo domstico. Certas substncias das baterias podem ter um impacto potencialmente negativo na sade e no meio ambiente e vossa responsabilidade reciclar baterias usadas, contribuindo assim para a proteco, preservao, e melhoramento da qualidade domeio ambiente. Deve contactar a sua autoridade ou revendedor local para obter detalhes sobre os planos disponveis de recolha e de reciclagem. Alternativamente, visite: www.euro.dell.com/recycling. Registo, Avaliao e Autorizao de Produtos Qumicos

(REACH - Registration, Evaluation, and Authorization ofChemicals) REACH o sistema regulador de substncias qumicas da Unio Europeia. Informaes sobre substncias que so motivo de alta preocupao e que existem nos produtos Dell numa concentrao acima de 0,1 % em peso, podem ser encontradas em www.Dell.com/REACH. Avisos de Normalizao Para compatibilidade electromagntica, consulte www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Para produtos com LAN sem fios / Interfaces 802.11 Os produtos que se enquadram nesta categoria so estipulados por incluso do smbolo de identificao de Classe 2 (ponto de exclamao num crculo) juntamente com a Marca CE na etiqueta reguladora de produtos ou naplaca de plug-in 802.11, exemplo abaixo:

NOTA: O nmero do rgo notificado identificado por NBnr apenas estar presente quando for necessrio e no ter influncia na restrio de utilizao quer esteja ou nopresente. Unio Europeia Declarao de conformidade da Directiva 1999/5/CE

(R&TTE) abreviada Neste documento, a Dell Inc. declara que todos os produtos Dell marcados com CE, que incluem funcionalidade de equipamentos de rdio e terminais de telecomunicaes esto em conformidade com os requisitos bsicos e outras clusulas relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Pode solicitar da Dell uma cpia da declarao de conformidade no formato completo:

Dell Inc. One Dell Way Mailstop: PS4-30 Round Rock, Texas USA 78682 OU Enviar um e-mail para Regulatory_Compliance@Dell.com Precisa incluir na solicitao o nome de marketing, modelo regulamentar e tipo regulamentar. DKKAT: DKKAT ifadesi ynergelere uyulmadnda donanmn zarar grebileceini veya veri kayb olabileceini belirtir. UYARI: UYARI ifadesi maddi hasar, yaralanma veya lm tehlikesi olduunu gsterir. Gvenlik ve Yasal Dzenleme Bilgileri Dier En yi Gvenlik Uygulamalar bilgilerini ve REACH, Elektromanyetik Uyumluluk (EMC), Ergonomi, Tama ve Tunerler hakkndaki bilgileri Yasal Uyumluluk sayfasnda bulabilirsiniz: www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. UYARI: Belgenizde belirtilenler dnda denetimlerin, dzeltmelerin, yordamlarn, balantlarn veya sinyal tiplerinin kullanlmas elektrik arpmasna, elektrikten kaynaklanan hasarlara ve/veya mekanik hasarlara yol aabilir. DKKAT: Dell rnleri tbbi elektrikli cihaz olarak sertifikal deildir ve hastalarn veya oksijen ynnden zengin ortamlarn yaknnda kullanm amal deildir. Dell rnleri tehlikeli ortamlarda kullanlmak iin tasarlanmamtr. Dell rnleri tbbi cihazlar altrmak veya ayarlamak iin tasarlanmamtr ve bu amal deildir. 2013 - 2014 Dell Inc. Printed in China Printed on Recycled Paper 2014-04 UYARI: Herhangi bir kapa (bilgisayar kapaklar, src kapaklar, yuva dolgu kapaklar ve n panel kapa vb.) kartlm haldeyken bilgisayarnz altrmayn. Ekipmannz slak ortamda kullanmayn. Donanm, iine sv dklmesine kar koruyun. Ak, ypranm veya hasar grm g kablolar dahil olmak zere hasarl ekipman kullanmayn. Ekipmannzn havalandrma deliklere veya aklklarna herhangi bir nesne sokmayn. Bunu yapmak, i bileenlerde ksa devre oluturarak, yangn kmasna veya elektrik okuna yol aabilir. Tanabilir bilgisayarnz veya adaptrnz, taban cilde uzun sre dorudan temas edecek eklide altrmayn. Tabann yzey ss normal alma srasnda, zellikle de AC gc kullanlrken artacaktr. Cilde srekli olarak temas rahatszla veya yanmaya neden olabilir. Tanabilir bir bilgisayar tm g kaynaklarndan karmak iin, bilgisayar kapatn, AC adaptrn elektrik prizinden karn ve pil blmesindeki veya modl blmesindeki tm pilleri karn. Aygtnzn inde alrken UYARI: Tehlikeli hareketli paralar. Hareketli fan baklarndan uzak durun. Dell belgelerinde veya Dell tarafndan size verilen dier ynergelerde aklanan durumlar dnda, ekipmannzn servisini kendiniz yapmayn. Daima kurulum ve servis ynergelerine uyun. Normal alma srasnda dahili bileenler ar snabilir. Dahili bileenlere dokunmadan nce soumalarn bekleyin. Bellek/modem eriim kapan amadan nce telefon kablosu dahil btn kablolar tanabilir bilgisayardan karn. Ekipmannz elektrik prizine balamadan nce, gereken voltaj ve frekansn mevcut g kaynayla eletiinden emin olmak iin voltaj deerini kontrol edin. Aygtnzda manuel voltaj seme anahtar varsa, bulunduunuz konumda kullanlan doru altrma voltaj arka paneldeki voltaj seme anahtar ile manuel olarak ayarlanmaldr. Elektrik arpmasn nlemek iin ekipmann g kablolarn dzgn ekilde topraklanm prizlere takn ve sadece ekipmana uygun onayl g kablolarn kullann. 3 pimli filer iin topraklama pimi olmayan fi adaptrlerini kullanmayn veya fiin topraklama pimini karmayn. Adaptr Gvenlii Sadece Dell tarafndan salanan ve bu aygtla kullanm onaylanm AC adaptr kullann. Baka bir AC adaptrnn kullanlmas, yangna veya patlamaya neden olabilir. Bilgisayarnzn normal almas srasnda AC adaptr snabilir. alma srasnda veya almadan hemen sonra adaptr tarken dikkatli olun ve yeterli havalandrmann bulunmasn salayn. Ticari nakil aralar gibi yksek voltaj olan (24 VDC) aralarda otomobil akmak adaptr veya uak tipi konektr zerinden bal oto adaptr DC g kablosu kullanmayn. Pil Gvenlii UYARI: Uyumlu olmayan pil veya nc taraf reticiye ait pil kullanlmas yangn veya patlama riskiniartrr. Pilinizi sadece Dellden satn alnm ve Dell bilgisayarnzda kullanlmak zere tasarlanm bir pille deitirin. Dier bilgisayarla ait pilleri bilgisayarnz iin kullanmayn. Hasarl pil kiisel yaralanma riski dourabilir. Hasarlar, pilde kmelere veya delik almasna neden olan arpma veya sarslma, atee maruz kalma veya dier deformasyonlardr. Pilin iini amayn. Hasarl veya sznt yapan pil takmn son derece dikkatle tutun. Pil hasar grdyse, hcrelerden elektrolit akabilir veya kiisel yaralanmalara yol aabilecek yanmalar olabilir. Geri Dnm Bilgileri Dell, kullanlm bilgisayar donanm, monitr, yazcve dier yardmc ekipmanlarn evresel duyarllk gzetilerek atlmasn nerir. Olas yntemler arasnda, paralarn veya rnlerin tmnn yeniden kullanm ve rnlerin, bileenlerin ve/veya malzemelerin geri dntrlmesi saylabilir. Dellin dnya genelindeki geri dnm programlar hakknda bilgi almak iin bkz. dell.com/recycle. Radyo Mevzuat Etiketlerinin Konumu Baz tanabilir bilgisayarlarda, radyo mevzuat etiketleri pil blmesinde veya alt eriim panelinde yer alabilir. Ergonomik Kullanm Talimatlar UYARI: Klavyenin uygun olmayan ekilde veya ok uzun sre boyunca kulanlmas yaralanmaya neden olabilir. UYARI: Ekrana veya bir harici monitre ok uzun sre boyunca baklmas gzlerde yorulmaya neden olabilir. UYARI: Kulak ii kulaklk veya askl kulaklklarn yksek ses basnc oluturuacak ekilde kullanlmas duyma bozukluuna veya duyma kaybna neden olabilir. Sesseviyesi denetimleri veya equalizer ayarlarnn orta konumdan daha yukar getirilmesi kulaklklarn k voltajn ve dolaysyla ses basncn ykseltir. Kulaklk kn retici tarafndan belirlenenden

(rnein, iletim sistemi, equalizer yazlm, rn yazlm, src) baka bir dzeye getiren faktrler kulaklklarn k voltajn ve dolaysyla ses basnc dzeyini ykseltir. Kulaklklar retici tarafndan belirlenenler dndaki ayarlarla kullanmak ses basnc dzeyini ykseltir. Olumsuz k koullar altnda (rnein gne nn dorudan gelmesi) mobil kullanm srasnda okunabilirlii dren yansmalar grlebilir. Atk Elektrikli ve Elektronik Ekipman (WEEE - Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Ynergesi Avrupa Birliinde bu etiket, rnn ev elektronii aletleri atklar ile imha edilemeyeceini gsterir. Kurtarmak ve geri dnmn salamak iin uygun artlarda saklanmas gerekir. lkenizde bu rnn nasl geri dntrld hakknda bilgi almak iin www.euro.dell.com/recycling adresini ziyaret edin. Trkiye - Trkiye RoHS EEE Ynetmeligine Uygundur Elektrikli Ve Elektronik Esyalarda Bazi Zararli Maddelerin Kullaniminin Sinirlandirilmasina Dair Ynetmelik Pillerin Atlmas Avrupa Birliinde bu etiket, bu rndeki pillerin ayr olarak toplanmas, ev atklaryla birlikte atlmamas gerektiini belirtir. Pillerin iindeki maddelerin insan sal ve evre zerinde olumsuz etkileri olabilir ve siz atk pilleri geri dntrme rolyle evrenin korunmasna ve gelitirilmesine katkda bulunmu olursunuz. Mevcut toplama ve geri dnm planlar hakknda bilgi iin yerel makamlara veya satcnza bavurun. Alternatif olarak, ltfen u adresi ziyaret edin: www.euro.dell.com/recycling. Kimyasal Maddeleri Kaydetme, Deerlendirme ve Onaylama (REACH) REACH, Avrupa Birlii (EU) kimyasal madde mevzuat sistemidir. Dell rnlerinde konsantrasyonu arlka (w/w)

%0,1i aan tehlikeli maddeler hakknda bilgi almak iin:

www.Dell.com/REACH. Dzenleyici Uyarlar Elektromanyetik Uyumluluk (EMC) iin bkz. www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Kablosuz LAN / 802.11 Arabirimlerine sahip rnler iin Bu kategoriye dahil olan rnler, rn, radyo mevzat etiketi veya 802.11 taklabilir kart zerindeki Snf 2 tanmlayc sebmol (ember iinde nlem iareti) ve CE areti ile belirtilir. rnek aadadr:

NOT: NBnr ile gsterilen Onaylanm Kurulu numaras sadece gerektiinde gsterilir ve bu numarann kullanm kstlamasyla herhangi bir ilgisi yoktur.

:

.

:

.

)REACH(

)EMC(

) s ( Regulatory Compliance

.www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance

:

. /

Dell :

. Dell Dell

.

( )( :

. )

. :

. Dell Dell

. /

. Dell

. ) 24(

:

. Dell

.Dell

. . Dell

. Dell

.dell.com/recycle For Products With Wireless LAN / 802.11 Interfaces Products that fall into this category are denoted by inclusion of the Class 2 identifier symbol

(exclamation mark in a circle) accompanying the CE Mark on the product or radio regulatory label, or on the 802.11 plug-in card, example below:

NOTE: The Notified Body number denoted by NBnr will only be present when required and has no bearing on the usage restriction whether present or not. Location of Radio Regulatory Labels For some portable computers, the radio regulatory labels may be found either in the battery compartment, or under the bottom access panel.

:

.

:

.

:

.

(

)

.

:(

. )

.

:

.www.euro.dell.com/recycling

.

: . www.euro.dell.com/recycling

)REACH(

REACH

.

% 0.1 Dell

.www.Dell.com/REACH Regulatory Notices For Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), see www.dell.com/ regulatory_compliance.

Setup Instructions Quick Setup 1 2 1 3 NOTE: Your computer has a factory-sealed battery. Before you press the power button to turn on the computer for the first time, make sure that the AC adapter is connected to the computer. 2 Undocking the Tablet The notebook you have can become the tablet you want. Quick Tour 1 q

-

4 9 8 r 7 6 e w u i t y o p a 2 3 4 5 1 Internal microphones (2) 2 Wireless antennas (4) 3 Windows button

(displays the Start screen) 4 Speakers (2) 5 Wireless key 6 TouchPad 7 Windows key

(displays the Start screen) 8 Mute key/Mute light 9 Release latch

- Webcam q Webcam light w Power button e Webcam (rear)*

r Volume up/down button Leap Motion*

Leap Motion allows you to control custom apps with your hands and fingers in the air. When you first turn Leap Motion on, follow the setup instructions to experience the interactive tutorial and create an account for Airspace, the Leap Motion app store. Airspace is where you will launch your Leap Motion apps, and discover new apps designed specifically for 3D interaction using the accuracy of Leap Motion technology. Press fn and then the spacebar to turn the Leap Motion sensor on or off. Access Airspace using either of the following methods:

From the Start screen, select the Leap Motion Airspace app. From the Windows desktop, select the Leap Motion Airspace icon. For more information about Leap Motion, go to http://www.leapmotion.com. Enjoy your own personal help desk*

Get immediate answers to your computer questions with HP SmartFriend Services. For more information, go to http://www.hpremoteservices.com. Share files and media between devices*

Exchange photos, files, data, music, and videos between your mobile devices. Using sMedio 360 software and (on select models) NFC hardware, you can wirelessly stream and transfer media between your Windows computer and Android smartphone. 1. To explore all of the sMedio features, go to the Windows desktop and click the sMedio TrueSync icon in the taskbar or on the desktop. 2. On the Sign-in/Create Account screen, click Learn More. Or go to http://www.smedio.co.jp/en/sMedio360_hp/. t Audio-out (headphone)/

Audio-in (microphone) combo jack y Micro memory card reader u Alignment post connectors

(2) i Docking port o Micro SIM slot*

p Power connector a Memory card reader s AC adapter/battery light d Power connector f HDMI port g USB ports (2) h Audio-out (headphone)/

Audio-in (microphone) combo jack Find more information Windows models app on the Start screen. To learn about Windows, select the Getting Started with Windows 8 To access the user guides, select the HP Support Assistant app on the Start screen, select My computer, and then select User guides. Linux models Double-click the HP Documents icon on the desktop. NOTE: A User Guides disc is included with some models. Your computer is protected by a free subscription to McAfee LiveSafe service for a limited time from the first time you use the computer. You will have the option to purchase McAfee LiveSafe service upon expiration of the subscription. McAfee LiveSafe service helps protect your identity, your data, and your devices with a single subscription.*

s d f g h

* Select models only. NOTE: Computer color, features, and accessories may vary.

* Select models only. Locate system information Depending on your computer model, a service label is either affixed to the bottom of the computer or is located inside the battery bay or beneath the service door. In Windows, briefly press the fn+esc key combination to display the System Information screen, which provides the product name and serial number of your computer, as well as information about the memory, processor, BIOS, and keyboard. Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller.

* Select models only. Limited Warranty You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For some countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

Europe, Middle East, Africa:

Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9 20063 Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy North America:

Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd. Boise, ID 83714, U SA When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Asia Pacific:

Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200 Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 Replace this box with PI statement as per spec. 763383-001 Navigating the Windows Start Screen The Windows Start screen provides a central location where you can access your information and email, browse the Web, stream videos, view photos, and access your social media websites. Depending on your computer model, you can use a keyboard and mouse, the TouchPad, or a touch screen to navigate the Start screen. In the instructions below, the keyboard and mouse icon are used to indicate the corresponding instructions. and the touch gesture icon 5 1 3 4 Using a keyboard and mouse 2 Using touch gestures 1 Open an app Click a Start screen app. To quickly return to the Start screen, press the Windows key on your keyboard. 1 Open an app Tap a Start screen app. To quickly return to the Start screen, press the Windows key on your keyboard. 2 Display the charms (Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings) Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen. 3 Find a list of all the apps on your computer Point to the lower-left area of the Start screen, and then click the arrow

. 4 Display the Start menu Point to the lower-left corner of the Start screen to display the Start button and then right-click the Start button. 5 Switch between open apps Point to the upper-left corner of the Start screen to reveal a list of open apps, and then click an open app. TIP: To quickly return to the Start screen, press the Windows key keyboard. on your 2 Display the charms (Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings) Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen.

, 3 Find a list of all the apps on your computer Swipe to the left on the TouchPad or touch screen until the arrow appears, and then tap the arrow in the lower-left corner of the Start screen. 4 Display the Start menu Tap the Desktop app, and then press and release the Start button the lower-left corner. in 5 Switch between open apps Swipe in and out from the left edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to reveal a list of open apps, and then tap an open app. Touch gestures for TouchPad or touch screen Use touch gestures with the TouchPad and, on select computer models, with a touch screen. Search for an app, setting, or file 1. From the Start screen, begin typing the name of an app, setting, or file. 2. Select the app, setting, or file from the list that is displayed on the screen. Go wireless From the Start screen, type wireless, and then select Connect to a network. NOTE: To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need a broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (purchased separately), high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider, and a wireless router (purchased separately). Shut down your computer To shut down your computer, swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, select Settings, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Return to the Start screen Press the Windows key on your keyboard to return to the Start screen. Documentation feedback HP is committed to providing documentation that meets your needs. To help us improve the documentation, please send any suggestions, comments, or errors to doc.feedback@hp.com. Include the document title and part number when submitting your feedback. Regulatory Model Number The Regulatory Model Numbers (RMN) are TPN-C118 and TPN-C119. The RMNs are located on the bottom of the unit near the battery compartment. Tap/Double-tap to select Top-edge swipe to display app command options Right-edge swipe to display the charms Left-edge swipe to switch between open apps Two-finger click

(same as right-clicking with a mouse) Two-finger pinch zoom Two-finger scroll

(TouchPad only) One-finger slide

(touch screen only) NOTE: Some computers, apps, and files do not support all touch gestures. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. For more safety and regulatory information, and for battery disposal information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices provided with your user guides. To locate the user guides for your computer, see the Find more information section of this poster. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide provided with your user guides. It describes proper workstation setup, and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. The Safety & Comfort Guide is also available on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. WARNING: To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Product description This product is a lightweight notebook computer and features a thin-panel display, TouchPad, processor, keyboard, RAM, integrated battery pack, hard drive or solid state drive, and an external AC adapter. The printed Setup Instructions identify the hardware components of your computer. Depending on your computer model, the AC adapter has a rating of 100-240 V ac, 50-60 Hz, 2.3 A, 3.3 A, or 4.6 A. To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and select your country. Select Drivers & Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. McAfee LiveSafe is a trademark of McAfee, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of the Microsoft group of companies. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 8. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, and/or software to take full advantage of Windows 8 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com for details. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: May 2014

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and select your country. Select Drivers & Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: May 2014 Document Part Number: 763382-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Starting right ...................................................................................................................................................... 1 Visit the HP Apps Store ........................................................................................................................ 1 Best practices ....................................................................................................................................... 1 Fun things to do .................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................. 3 2 Getting to know your computer ......................................................................................................................... 5 Finding your hardware and software information ................................................................................. 5 Locating hardware ............................................................................................................... 5 Locating software ................................................................................................................. 5 Tablet edge components ...................................................................................................................... 6 Display .................................................................................................................................................. 9 Keyboard dock ................................................................................................................................... 11 Top ..................................................................................................................................... 11 TouchPad .......................................................................................................................... 12 Lights ................................................................................................................................. 13 Keys ................................................................................................................................... 15 Front .................................................................................................................................. 17 Right side ........................................................................................................................... 18 Rear side ........................................................................................................................... 19 Releasing the tablet from the keyboard dock .................................................................... 20 Locating system information ............................................................................................................... 20 Changing your tablet's settings .......................................................................................................... 20 Changing your tablet's view ............................................................................................... 20 Turning your tablet's autorotate lock on or off ................................................... 21 Adjusting your tablet's screen brightness .......................................................... 21 Using touch screen gestures (select models only) ............................................................................. 21 One-finger slide ................................................................................................................. 21 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 23 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 23 2-finger pinch zoom ........................................................................................................... 24 Rotating (select models only) ............................................................................................ 24 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 25 Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 25 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 25 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe .......................................................... 26 v Setting touch screen preferences ....................................................................................................... 26 Using the on-screen keyboard ........................................................................................................... 26 3 Connecting to a network ................................................................................................................................. 28 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 28 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 28 Using the wireless button .................................................................................. 28 Using operating system controls ....................................................................... 28 Sharing data and drives and accessing software .............................................................. 29 Using a WLAN ................................................................................................................... 29 Using an Internet service provider .................................................................... 29 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................ 30 Configuring a wireless router ............................................................................ 30 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................... 30 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................... 31 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ..................................................... 31 4 Enjoying entertainment features ..................................................................................................................... 33 Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 33 Using the webcams ............................................................................................................................ 36 Using audio ........................................................................................................................................ 36 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................... 36 Connecting headphones and microphones ....................................................................... 36 Using Beats Audio ............................................................................................................. 36 Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel ............................................................... 37 Enabling and disabling Beats Audio .................................................................. 37 Testing your audio features ............................................................................................... 37 Using video ......................................................................................................................................... 38 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable ............................................................... 39 Setting up HDMI audio ...................................................................................... 40 5 Navigating the screen ..................................................................................................................................... 41 Using the TouchPad and gestures ..................................................................................................... 41 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 42 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 43 2-finger pinch zoom ........................................................................................................... 43 2-finger click ....................................................................................................................... 44 Rotating (select models only) ............................................................................................ 44 Flicking (select models only) .............................................................................................. 45 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 45 vi Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 45 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 46 Top-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 46 Using the keyboard and mouse .......................................................................................................... 47 Using the keys ................................................................................................................... 47 Using the action keys ........................................................................................ 47 Using Windows shortcut keys ........................................................................... 48 Using the hot keys ............................................................................................. 48 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................................................. 49 Initiating Sleep and Hibernation ......................................................................................................... 49 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep .................................................................................. 50 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) ....................................... 50 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 50 Using the power meter and power settings ........................................................................................ 51 Running on battery power .................................................................................................................. 51 Factory-sealed battery ....................................................................................................... 51 Finding battery information ................................................................................................ 51 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 52 Identifying low battery levels .............................................................................................. 52 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................. 52 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ........................ 52 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ..................... 52 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....... 52 Running on external AC power .......................................................................................................... 53 Troubleshooting power problems ...................................................................................... 53 Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) .......... 54 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ........................................................................................... 54 7 Maintaining your computer .............................................................................................................................. 56 Improving performance ...................................................................................................................... 56 Handling drives .................................................................................................................. 56 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 56 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 57 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 57 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................... 57 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................... 58 Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) .............................................. 58 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................... 58 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse ................................................... 58 Traveling with or shipping your computer ........................................................................................... 58 vii 8 Securing your computer and information ........................................................................................................ 60 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 60 Setting Windows passwords .............................................................................................. 61 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................. 61 TPM Embedded Security device (select models only) ....................................................................... 61 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................... 62 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................... 62 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................... 63 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................. 63 Installing critical security updates ...................................................................................... 63 Installing HP and third-party software updates .................................................................. 63 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................... 63 Backing up your software applications and information ..................................................................... 63 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ............................................................ 64 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................... 64 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 64 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 64 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 65 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ...................................................................................... 65 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device ............................... 66 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .......................................................................................................... 67 Creating recovery media and backups ............................................................................................... 67 Creating HP Recovery media ............................................................................................ 67 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................... 68 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .......................................................................... 69 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 69 Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ...................................... 69 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................... 70 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................... 70 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ................................................ 70 11 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 71 Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 71 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 71 12 Electrostatic Discharge ................................................................................................................................. 72 viii Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 73 ix x 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Visit the HP Apps Store The HP Apps Store offers a wide choice of popular games, entertainment and music apps, productivity apps, and apps exclusive to HP that you can download to the Start screen. The selection is updated regularly and includes regional content and country-specific offers. Be sure to check the HP Apps Store frequently for new and updated features. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the HP Apps Store. To view and download an app:

1. 2. 3. From the Start screen, select the Store app. Select HP picks to view all the available apps. Select the app you want to download, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the download is complete, the app appears on the All apps screen. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 28. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 5 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 33. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 62. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 67. Fun things to do You know that you can watch a YouTube video on the computer. But did you know that you can also connect your computer to a TV or gaming console? For more information, see Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable on page 39. You know that you can listen to music on the computer. But did you know that you can also stream live radio to the computer and listen to music or talk radio from all over the world? See Using audio on page 36. Visit the HP Apps Store 1 Experience music the way the artist intended, with deep controlled bass and clear, pure sound. See Using Beats Audio on page 36. Use the TouchPad and the new Windows touch gestures for smooth control of images and pages of text. See Using the TouchPad and gestures on page 41. 2 Chapter 1 Starting right More HP resources You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including proper battery disposal information Specific warranty information about this computer Resource Setup Instructions Help and Support To access Help and Support, from the Start screen, type help, and then from the Search window, select Help and Support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Worldwide support To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My computer, and then select User guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this guide:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Limited Warranty*

To access this guide:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My computer, and then select Warranty and services. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 More HP resources 3 Resource Contents When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. 4 Chapter 1 Starting right 2 Getting to know your computer Finding your hardware and software information Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select System, and then click Device Manager in the left column. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. To find out information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc. Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Mode Steps 1. From the Start screen, right-click using the mouse. or Swipe from the top of the TouchPad to reveal all apps. Select the All apps icon. From the Start screen, gently swipe your finger from the top edge or the bottom edge of the display bezel onto the screen. Tap All apps. 2. 1. 2. Finding your hardware and software information 5 Tablet edge components Components Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Micro SIM slot (select models only) Supports a wireless subscriber identity module (SIM). Alignment post connectors (2) Align and attach the tablet to the keyboard dock. Docking port/power connector Micro memory card reader Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) combo jack Connects the tablet to the keyboard dock and connects an AC adapter. Reads optional micro memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card, hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot. Insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card, press in on the card until it pops out. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select User guides. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Components Description

(7) Power button

(8) Webcam (rear) (select models only) NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in (microphone). When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the tablet. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the tablet. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. In the search box, type power, select Settings, and then select Power options, or see Managing power on page 49. or On the Start screen, type power, select Power and sleep settings, and then select Power and sleep, or see Managing power on page 49. Records video, captures still photographs, and allows video conferences and online chat by means of streaming video. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. or From the Start screen, type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications.

(9) Volume up/down button Controls speaker volume on the tablet. To increase speaker volume, press the + edge of the button. To decrease speaker volume, press the edge of the button.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Tablet edge components 7 Components Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select User guides. Description 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Display Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Description WLAN antennas (2)*

WWAN antennas (2) (select models only) Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless world wide networks (WWAN). Internal microphones (2) Record sound. Webcam light (front) Webcam (front) On: The webcam is in use. Records video, captures still photographs, and allows you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. or From the Start screen, type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications.

(6) Speakers (2) Produce sound. Display 9 Component Description

(7) Windows button Returns you to the Start screen from any app or window.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select User guides. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keyboard dock Top Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) Alignment posts Release latch Align and attach the tablet to the keyboard dock. Releases the tablet from the keyboard dock. To release the tablet, slide the release latch to the left. Docking connector Connects the tablet to the keyboard dock. Keyboard dock 11 TouchPad Component

(1) TouchPad zone Description Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. NOTE: The TouchPad also supports edge-swipe gestures. For more information, see Edge swipes on page 45.

(2)

(3) Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Functions like the left button of an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Lights NOTE: Refer to the image that most closely matches your keyboard. Component

(1) Caps lock light

(2) Mute light Description White: Caps lock is on. Off: Caps lock is off. Amber: Computer sound is off. Keyboard dock 13 Component Description Off: Computer sound is on. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keys NOTE: Refer to the image that most closely matches your keyboard. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) esc key fn key Windows key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key (select models only). Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the b key or the esc key (select models only). Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Keyboard dock 15 Component Description NOTE: Action keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard of the tablet. 16 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Front Component Power button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. From the Start screen, type power, select Power and sleep settings, and then select Power and sleep from the list of applications. Keyboard dock 17 Right side Component Description Memory card reader Connects optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert the memory card, hold the card, label side up with connectors facing the slot and push in the card until it is firmly seated. To remove the memory card, press in on the card and quickly release it until it pops out. 18 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Rear side Component Description

(1) AC adapter/battery light White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Blinking white: The battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The computer is using battery power.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. HDMI port USB 3.0 ports (2) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) combo jack Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. Each USB 3.0 port connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select User guides. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-

in (microphone). Keyboard dock 19 Releasing the tablet from the keyboard dock To release the tablet from the keyboard dock, follow these steps:

1. Slide the release latch on the keyboard dock to the left (1). Lift and remove the tablet (2). 2. Locating system information Important system information is located on the bottom edge of the tablet or on the keyboard base. You may need the information when travelling internationally or when you contact support:

Serial number Product number Warranty period Using Windows, briefly press the fn+esc key combination (select models only) to display the System Information screen, which provides the product name and serial number of your computer, as well as information about the memory, processor, BIOS, and keyboard. Regulatory and wireless certification information Changing your tablet's settings You can change view and screen brightness. Changing your tablet's view Your tablet's orientation, or view, changes automatically from landscape to portrait view, or from portrait to landscape view. To change the view of your tablet from landscape view to portrait view:

20 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Hold the tablet horizontally, and then turn it 90 degrees to the right (in a clockwise direction). To change the view of your tablet from portrait view to landscape view:

Hold the tablet vertically, and then turn it 90 degrees to the left (in a counter-clockwise direction). Turning your tablet's autorotate lock on or off Autorotate automatically changes the orientation of the tablet screen depending on which way you are holding the tablet. You can lock the screen orientation in place so that it does not automatically rotate. To turn your tablet's autorotate lock on or off:

1. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, and then tap Settings. Tap the Screen icon at the bottom right. Tap the autorotate lock icon to lock your current tablet screen in place and to prevent rotation. The icon displays a lock symbol when autorotate lock is active. To turn off the autorotate lock, tap the autorotate lock icon again. 2. Adjusting your tablet's screen brightness To adjust the screen brightness:

1. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, and then tap Settings. Tap the Screen icon at the bottom right. A vertical slider displays that controls the screen brightness. 2. NOTE: From the Windows desktop, you can also tap the Power Meter icon in the notification area at the far right of the taskbar, tap Adjust screen brightness, and then move the slider next to Screen brightness at the bottom of the screen. Using touch screen gestures (select models only) A touch screen computer allows you to control items on the screen directly with your fingers. TIP: On touch screen computers, you can perform the gestures on the screen or on the TouchPad. You can also perform on-screen actions with the keyboard and mouse. One-finger slide The one-finger slide is mostly used to pan or scroll through lists and pages, but you can use it for other interactions, too, such as moving an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. NOTE: When many apps are displayed on the Start screen, you can slide your finger to move the screen left or right. To drag, press and hold an object, and then drag the object to move it. Using touch screen gestures (select models only) 21 22 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function. Use one finger to tap an object on the screen to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving the pointer up, down, left, or right on a page or image. Place two fingers on the screen and then drag them in an up, down, left, or right motion. Using touch screen gestures (select models only) 23 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the screen and then moving your fingers apart. Rotating (select models only) Rotating allows you to turn items such as photos. Anchor the forefinger of your left hand on the object you want to rotate. Using your right hand, slide your forefinger around in a sweeping motion from 12 oclock to 3 oclock. To reverse the rotation, move your forefinger from 3 oclock to 12 oclock. NOTE: Rotate is intended for specific apps where you can manipulate an object or image. Rotate may not be functional for all apps. 24 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Edge swipes With edge swipes you can perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Gently swipe your finger inward from the right edge of the display onto the screen to reveal the charms. Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe reveals your open apps so that you can switch to them quickly. Gently swipe your finger inward from the left edge of the display to switch between apps. Without lifting your finger, swipe back toward the left edge to reveal all open apps. Using touch screen gestures (select models only) 25 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe The top-edge swipe or bottom-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is open, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your finger from the top edge or the bottom edge to reveal the app command options. Setting touch screen preferences Mode Steps 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, tap Control Panel, tap Hardware and Sound, tap Pen and Touch, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 1. On the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. 2. Select Hardware and Sound, select Pen and Touch, and then follow the on-screen instructions. These preferences are specific to the touch screen and the computer. Using the on-screen keyboard You may want to enter data into a data field. This may be required when you set up a wireless network configuration or a weather reporting location, or when you access user accounts on Internet sites. The computer has an on-screen keyboard that is displayed when you need to enter such information. 26 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 1. 2. 3. 4. To display the keyboard, tap in the first data field. Tap the small keyboard icon that is displayed. or Tap the keyboard icon on the right side of the notification area. To enlarge the size of the on-screen keyboard, tap the lower-right corner and drag it to the desired size. Tap each character, continuing until you have spelled out the name or word that you are entering into the data field. NOTE: Action keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed at the top of the on-screen keyboard. If an appropriate word is displayed, tap it to select it. Tap enter on the keyboard. Using the on-screen keyboard 27 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. Bluetooth device (select models only)Creates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using these features:

Wireless button, wireless switch, wireless key, or airplane mode key (referred to in this chapter as the wireless button) (select models only) Operating system controls Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights, depending on the model. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless light is on (white) when you turn on the computer. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is white, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Using operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. 28 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network To use operating system controls:

1. 2. For more information, from the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. Sharing data and drives and accessing software When your computer is part of a network, you are not limited to using only the information that is stored in your computer. Network computers can exchange software and data with each other. NOTE: When a disc like a DVD movie or game is copy-protected, it cannot be shared. To share folders or content on the same network:

1. 2. From the Windows desktop, open File Explorer. From This PC, click a folder with content you want to share. Select Share from the navigation bar at the top of the window, and then click Specific people. Type a name in the File Sharing box, and then click Add. 3. 4. Click Share and then follow the on-screen instructions. To share drives on the same network:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select Open Network and Sharing Center. 2. 3. Under View your active networks, select an active network. 4. Select Change advanced sharing settings to set sharing options for privacy, network discovery, file and printer sharing or other network options. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The Connecting to a wireless network 29 ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) A wireless computer (3) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help in configuring a wireless router, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. NOTE:

It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the network cable provided with the router. When the computer successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. If you are concerned about the security of your computer when connected to a hotspot, limit your network activities to email that is not confidential and basic Internet surfing. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Use a firewall. 30 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network A firewall checks information and requests that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. For more information, from the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If the device is on, the wireless light is white. If the wireless light is off, press the wireless button. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. 2. From the Start screen, point to the far-right upper or lower corner of the screen to display the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. Select your WLAN from the list. 3. 4. 5. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click Sign in to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, from the Windows desktop, right-

click the network status icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 6. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Connecting to a wireless network 31 Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a PAN of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. 32 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, or TV, or speakers and headphones. Multimedia features Here are some of the entertainment features on your computer. Component Description

(1) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select User guides. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in (microphone).

(2) Volume button Controls speaker volume. To increase speaker volume, press the + edge of the button. Multimedia features 33 Component Description

(3) Webcam (rear) (select models only) To decrease speaker volume, press the edge of the button. Records video, captures still photographs, and allows video conferences and online chat by means of streaming video. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. or From the Start screen, type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. 34 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Internal microphones (2) Webcam light Webcam (front) Speakers (2) Memory card reader Description Record sound. On: The webcam is in use. Records video, captures still photographs, allows you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. or From the Start screen, type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. Produce sound. Connects optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert the memory card, hold the card, label side up with connectors facing the slot and push in the card until it is firmly seated. To remove the memory card, press in on the card and quickly release it until it pops out. NOTE: The following three multimedia features are located on the rear side of the keyboard dock as illustrated above.

(6)

(7)

(8) HDMI port USB 3.0 ports (2) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) combo jack Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. Connect optional USB devices, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select User guides. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in (microphone). Multimedia features 35 Using the webcams Your computer has one or two integrated webcams, a powerful social networking tool that allow you to communicate up close with friends and colleagues, whether they are next door or on the other side of the world. With the webcams, you can stream video with your instant messaging software, capture and share video, and take photos. To start the webcams, follow these steps:

Mode Steps 1. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. 2. From the Start screen, type c, and then select CyberLink YouCam from the list of applications. For details about using the webcams, refer to the software Help for the app. Using audio On your computer, you can play music CDs (with an optional external optical drive), download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-

out (headphone) jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 40. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones and microphones You can connect wired headphones or headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer. Many headsets with integrated microphones are commercially available. To connect wireless headphones or headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, select My computer, and then select User guides. Using Beats Audio Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. You can experience Beats Audio through the computer's internal speakers, through 36 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features external speakers connected to a USB port, or through Beats Audio headphones connected to the headphone jack. Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel Use Beats Audio Control Panel to view and manually control audio and bass settings. To open Beats Audio Control Panel, follow these steps:

Mode Steps 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. From the Start screen, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. Enabling and disabling Beats Audio To enable or disable Beats Audio, follow these steps:

Mode Steps 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. Follow the on-screen instructions From the Start screen, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. Follow the on-screen instructions Testing your audio features To check the audio function on your computer, follow these steps:

Mode Steps 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, tap Control Panel, tap Hardware and Sound, and then tap Sound. 3. When the Sound window opens, tap the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, tap any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and then tap Test. 1. On the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel from the list of applications. 2. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. 3. When the Sound window opens, select the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and then click Test. Using audio 37 Mode Steps You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

Mode Steps 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type s, and then select Sound Recorder. 3. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 4. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. 1. From the Start screen, type s, and then select Sound Recorder. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. Save the file to your desktop. 3. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer:

Mode Steps 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. Swipe from the right edge of the TouchPad or touch screen to display the charms, tap Search, and then tap the search box. Type c, and then select Control Panel from the list of applications. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel from the list of applications. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the keyboard dock to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. Your computer has a high-definition multimedia interface (HDMI) port, which allows you to connect a high-definition monitor or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Check the device manufacturer's instructions. 38 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your keyboard dock, you need an HDMI cable, sold separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions. 1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, adjust the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel from the list of applications. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Using video 39 Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers / HP. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 40 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features 5 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen in the following ways:

Touch gestures Keyboard and mouse Touch gestures can be used on your computer's TouchPad or on a touch screen (select models only). NOTE: An external USB mouse (purchased separately) can be connected to one of the USB ports on the keyboard dock. Select computer models have special action keys or hot key functions on the keyboard to perform routine tasks. Some computer models may also have an integrated numeric keypad. Using the TouchPad and gestures The TouchPad allows you to navigate the computer screen and control the pointer by using simple finger movements. You can customize the touch gestures by changing settings, button configurations, click speed, and pointer options. You can also view demonstrations of TouchPad gestures. From the Start screen, type control panel, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. TIP: Use the left and right buttons on the TouchPad as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. NOTE: TouchPad gestures are not supported in all apps. Using the TouchPad and gestures 41 Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function on the TouchPad. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. 42 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers apart. Using the TouchPad and gestures 43 2-finger click 2-finger click allows you to make menu selections for an object on the screen. NOTE: Using 2-finger click is the same action as using right-click with the mouse. Place two fingers on the TouchPad zone and press down to open the options menu for the selected object. Rotating (select models only) Rotating allows you to turn items such as photos. Point to an object, and then anchor the forefinger of your left hand in the TouchPad zone. Using your right hand, slide your forefinger in a sweeping motion from 12 oclock to 3 oclock. To reverse the rotation, move your forefinger from 3 oclock to 12 oclock. NOTE: Rotate is intended for specific apps where you can manipulate an object or image. Rotate may not be functional for all apps. 44 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Flicking (select models only) Flicking allows you to navigate through screens or quickly scroll through documents. Place three fingers on the TouchPad zone and flick your fingers in a light, quick motion up, down, left or right. Edge swipes Edge swipes allow you to perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Swipe your finger gently from the right edge to reveal the charms. Using the TouchPad and gestures 45 Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe accesses your recently opened apps so that you can switch between them quickly. Swipe your finger gently from the left edge of the TouchPad. Top-edge swipe The top-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is active, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your finger from the top edge to reveal the app command options. 46 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using the keyboard and mouse The keyboard and mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll and to perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard dock also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. NOTE: Action keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard of the tablet. on the keyboard allows you to quickly return to the Start screen from TIP: The Windows key an open app or the Windows desktop. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using the keys You can quickly access information or perform functions by using certain keys and key combinations. Using the action keys NOTE: Action keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard of the tablet. An action key on the keyboard dock performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the f1 through f4 and f6 through f12 keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. The keyboard dock action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility (BIOS). See Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) on page 64 for instructions on opening Setup Utility (BIOS), and then follow the instructions at the bottom of the screen. After you have disabled the action key feature on the keyboard dock, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Icon Key f1 f2 f3 f4 Description Opens Help and Support, which provides tutorials, information about the Windows operating system and your computer, answers to questions, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting tools and access to support. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Using the keyboard and mouse 47 Icon Key Description f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 f11 f12 Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Using Windows shortcut keys Windows provides shortcuts so that you can perform actions quickly. Press the Windows key alone or in combination with a specific key to perform a designated action. Using the hot keys A hot key is a combination of the fn key and the esc key, the b key, or the spacebar. To use a hot key:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the combination. 48 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power only and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Your computer supports an optimal power plan to manage how your computer uses and conserves power so that computer performance is balanced with power conservation. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation Microsoft Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity when running on battery power or on external power. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 50. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. NOTE: You can manually initiate Hibernation. See Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 50 and Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) on page 50. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation 49 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, and the tablet is connected to the keyboard dock, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap or swipe the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before the computer will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) From the Start screen, type power options, then select Power options. In the left pane, click Choose what the power button does. You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. 5. Click Save changes. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. In the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. NOTE:

password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type power options, then select Power options. 1. 2. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). NOTE:

If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. 50 Chapter 6 Managing power Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows desktop. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To reveal the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, on the Windows desktop, point over the power meter icon. To use Power Options, click the power meter icon and select an item from the list. From the Start screen, you can also type power options, and then select Power Options. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the tablet and the tablet is not plugged into external power, the tablet runs on battery power. If the tablet has a charged battery installed and the AC adapter is disconnected from the tablet, the tablet automatically switches to battery power and the screen brightness decreases to conserve battery life. The battery in the tablet slowly discharges when the tablet is off and unplugged from external power. When the tablet is attached to the keyboard dock, the system is powered by the keyboard docks battery until the battery reaches a critical level in the keyboard dock. At that time, the system switches to the tablets battery. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: There is a secondary battery in the keyboard dock. When the tablet is attached to the keyboard dock, the system is powered by the keyboard docks battery. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in Help and Support. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. If Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery(ies) in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Finding battery information To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in HP Support Assistant. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery test Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Using the power meter and power settings 51 Conserving battery power Tips for conserving battery power and maximizing battery life:

Lower the brightness on the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Remove a user-replaceable battery from the computer if it will not be used or charged for more than 2 weeks. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

or The power meter icon on the Windows desktop shows a low or critical battery notification. The battery light (select models only) indicates a low or critical battery level. NOTE: For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and power settings on page 51. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect an AC adapter. Connect an optional docking or expansion device. Connect an optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. 2. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. 52 Chapter 6 Managing power Running on external AC power For information about connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. Troubleshooting power problems Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights are off. To test the AC adapter:

1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Shut down the computer. Turn on the computer. Running on external AC power 53 If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the AC adapter to the AC outlet to be sure that the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) When the computer is in the Sleep state, Intel Smart Connect Technology periodically causes the computer to exit Sleep. If a network connection is available, Smart Connect updates open apps such as your email inboxes, social network sites, and news pages and then returns the computer to the Sleep state. Smart Connect also syncs content that you have created offline, such as emails. When the computer exits Sleep, you have immediate access to your updated information. To enable this feature or manually adjust the settings, from the Start screen, type smart, and then select Intel Smart Connect Technology. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Press the Windows key and the power button at the same time, and then tap Shut Down. To shut down the tablet when it is not connected to the keyboard dock:

Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command:

If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or NOTE:

Hibernation before shutdown is possible by briefly pressing the power button. 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 3. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. or Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen, select Shut down, and then select Shut down. 54 Chapter 6 Managing power If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

To shut down the unresponsive tablet:

To shut down the unresponsive tablet when it is connected to the keyboard dock:

Press both the Windows key and the power button at the same time. Press ctrl+alt+delete, click the Power icon, and then select Shut Down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 55 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter provides information about improving the performance of your computer by running tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides information about updating your programs and drivers, instructions for cleaning your computer, and tips for traveling with your computer. Improving performance Everyone wants a fast computer and you can drastically improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Also, as your computer gets older, you might consider installing larger drives and adding more memory. Handling drives Observe these precautions when handling drives:

Before removing or installing a drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off, in the Sleep state, or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down. Before handling a drive, discharge static electricity by touching a grounded surface. Do not touch the connector pins on a removable drive or on the computer. Do not use excessive force when inserting a drive into a drive bay. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble-pack mailer or other suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. Remove media from a drive before removing the drive from the drive bay, or traveling with, shipping, or storing a drive. Do not type on the keyboard or move the computer while an optical drive is writing to a disc. The write process is sensitive to vibration. Before you move a computer that is connected to an external hard drive, initiate Sleep and allow the screen to clear, or properly disconnect the external hard drive. Using Disk Defragmenter As you use your computer over time, the files on the hard drive become fragmented. A fragmented drive means data on your drive is not contiguous (sequential) and, because of this, the hard drive works harder to locate files, thus slowing down the computer. Disk Defragmenter consolidates (or physically reorganizes) the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. 56 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer After you start Disk Defragmenter, it works without supervision. However, depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may take more than an hour to complete. HP recommends defragmenting your hard drive at least once a month. You may set Disk Defragmenter to run on a monthly schedule, but you can defragment your computer manually at any time. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Connect the computer to AC power. From the Start screen, type disk. 2. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type disk, and then select Uninstall apps to free up disk space. Follow the on-screen instructions. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis to the latest versions. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. Technology is always changing, and updating programs and drivers allows your computer to run the latest technology available. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands). Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Water with mild soap solution Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Updating programs and drivers 57 Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is turned on. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that the display is dry before closing the display. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, here are some tips to keep in mind to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Attach the tablet to the keyboard dock to protect the tablet screen. Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. 58 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device installed, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 59 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the non-Windows Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Computer viruses Unauthorized access to data Security feature Power-on password Antivirus software Firewall software Unauthorized access to Setup Utility (BIOS) settings and other system identification information Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Unauthorized removal of the computer Software updates User password Security cable lock Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every three months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 60 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Setting Windows passwords Password User password Administrator password Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. NOTE:

password check, you must enter the administrator password to access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you enter the power-on password at the first Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: A power-on password is not revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

1. To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. TPM Embedded Security device (select models only) TPM (Trusted Platform Module) provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Setup Utility. For information on changing Setup Utility settings, see Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) on page 64. The following table describes the TPM settings in Setup Utility. TPM Embedded Security device (select models only) 61 Settings Function TPM Embedded Security Device Available/Hidden If the administrator password is set, you can select Available. If you select Hidden, the TPM device is not visible in the operating system. TPM Status Enabled/Disabled If the administrator password is not set, or if TPM Security Device is set to Hidden, this entry is hidden. This value reflects the current physical state for the TPM. The state is enabled or disabled by the Embedded Security State setting. Embedded Security State No Operation/Disabled/Enabled If the administrator password is not set, or if TPM Security Device is set to Hidden, this entry is hidden. You can enable or disable the TPM function. The next time the computer is restarted after the TPM function is set, this value is set to No Operation. TPM Set to Factory Defaults No/Yes If the administrator password is not set, or if the TPM Security Device is set to Hidden, this entry is hidden. If the Embedded Security State is set to Enabled, select Yes to reset the TPM to factory settings, and then press f10 to save and exit. A confirmation message is displayed to Clear the TPM. Press f1 to reset the TPM, or press f2 to cancel the action. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 62 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Microsoft Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. For more information, see Updating programs and drivers on page 57. Installing critical security updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can choose whether updates are installed automatically. To change the settings, from the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select Windows Update, select Change settings, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Installing HP and third-party software updates HP recommends that you regularly update the software and drivers that were originally installed on your computer. To download the latest versions, go to http://www.hp.com/support. At this location, you can also register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. If you have installed third-party software after you purchased your computer, regularly update the software. Software companies provide software updates to their products to correct security problems and improve functionality of the software. Securing your wireless network When you set up your wireless network, always enable security features. For more information, see Protecting your WLAN on page 30. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. For more information, see Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 67. Installing software updates 63 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be revealed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Main. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 64). To exit Setup Utility (BIOS) without saving your changes, use the arrow keys to select Exit, select Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Select Yes. 4. 64 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. 4. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. b. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before From the Start screen, type file, and then select File Explorer. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 65 To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 66. b. Hard drive c. BIOS 2. When the diagnostic tool opens, use the keyboard arrow keys to select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device Instructions for downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) are provided in English NOTE:

only. 1. Go to http://www.hp.com. 2. 3. Point to Support, located at the top of the page, and then click Download Drivers. In the text box, enter the product name, and then click Go. or Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. or Click Download, and then select Run. 4. 5. 66 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes:

Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system Creating recovery media and backups 1. After you successfully set up the computer, create HP Recovery media. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. HP Recovery media you create will provide the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system and the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image RecoveryReinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. See Creating HP Recovery media on page 67. 2. Use the Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Creating HP Recovery media HP Recovery Manager is a software program that offers a way to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and the software programs installed at the factory, and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of HP Recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the blank USB flash drive or the number of blank DVD discs that will be required. To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or instead you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased Creating recovery media and backups 67 separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take up to an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue, and the remaining discs will be burned. To create HP Recovery media:

IMPORTANT: For tablets, connect to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps (select models only). 1. 2. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 69. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Recovery Media Creation, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. From the Start screen, type recovery, select HP Recovery Manager, select Drivers and Applications Reinstall, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you want to reset your computer using a minimized image, you can choose the HP Minimized Image Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or HP Recovery media. Minimized Image Recovery installs only drivers and hardware-enabling applications. Other applications included in the image continue to be available for installation through the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option in HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 69. If you want to recover the computer's original factory partitioning and content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or use the HP Recovery media that you have created. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 69. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 67. 68 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering If you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media to restore the factory image to the replacement drive. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 69. If you wish to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select models only) on page 70. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you created or by using the HP Recovery partition (select models only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 67. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image Recovery (select models only)Reinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows System Recovery and Minimized Image Recovery. What you need to know HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 67. To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 67. If the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you wish to retain. Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows you to perform a system recovery or minimized image recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can only be used if the hard drive is still working. Restore and recovery 69 To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

IMPORTANT: For tablets, connect to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps (select models only). 1. Press f11 while the computer boots. or Press and hold f11 as you press the power button. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the HP Recovery media that you created, and then restart the computer. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 70. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Changing the computer boot order If computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection for an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

1. 2. Restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. 3. 4. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive you want to boot from. Follow the on-screen instructions. Insert the HP Recovery media you created. Removing the HP Recovery partition (select models only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you can no longer use the Windows Refresh option or the Windows option to remove everything and reinstall Windows. In addition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or Minimized Image Recovery from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media on page 67. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 70 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 11 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Input power 71 12 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded, and then remove the cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 72 Chapter 12 Electrostatic Discharge Index Symbols/Numerics 2-finger pinch zoom TouchPad gesture 24, 43 A AC adapter light, identifying 19 AC adapter, testing 53 action keys decrease screen brightness 47 Help and Support 47 identifying 15 increase screen brightness 47 next track or section 48 play, pause, resume 48 previous track or section 48 switch screen image 47 volume down 48 volume mute 48 volume up 48 wireless 48 airport security devices 56 alignment post connectors, identifying 6 alignment posts, identifying 11 antivirus software, using 62 audio functions, checking 37 audio-in (microphone) jacks 6, 19, 33, 35 audio-out (headphone) jacks 6, 19, 33, 35 autorotate lock 21 B backing up software and information 63 backups 67 battery discharging 52 factory-sealed 51 low battery levels 52 battery information, finding 51 battery power 51 Beats Audio 36 Beats Audio Control Panel 37 Beats Audio hot key 37 BIOS determining version 64 downloading an update 65 updating 64 Bluetooth device 28, 31 boot order changing HP Recovery Manager 70 buttons left TouchPad 12 power 7, 17 right TouchPad 12 Windows 10 C caps lock light, identifying 13 caring for your computer 57 checking audio functions 37 cleaning your computer 57 components display 9 front 17 rear-side 19 right-side 18 top 11 configuring audio for HDMI 40 connecting to a WLAN 31 corporate WLAN connection 31 critical battery level 52 critical security updates, installing 63 D deleted files restoring 68 Disk Cleanup software 57 Disk Defragmenter software 56 docking connector, identifying 11 docking port/power connector, identifying 6 E edge swipe gestures 25 edgeswipe gestures top-edge swipe 26 electrostatic discharge 72 esc key, identifying 15 external AC power, using 53 F factory-sealed battery 51 firewall software 63 fn key, identifying 15, 48 Fun things to do 1 H HDMI port connecting 39 identifying 19, 35 HDMI, configuring audio 40 headphones, connecting 36 Hibernation exiting 50 initiated during critical battery level 52 initiating 50 high-definition devices, connecting 39 hot keys description 48 using 48 HP and third-party software updates, installing 63 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

(UEFI) downloading 66 using 65 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 70 starting 70 HP Recovery media creating 67 recovery 70 HP Recovery partition recovery 69 removing 70 Index 73 I input power 71 installing critical security updates 63 Internet connection setup 30 Internet security software, using 62 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 6, 19, 33, 35 audio-out (headphone) 6, 19, 33, 35 K keyboard hot keys, identifying 48 keys action 15 esc 15 fn 15 Windows key 15 L labels, serial number 20 left-edge swipe 25 lights AC adapter 19 caps lock 13 mute 13 webcam 9, 35 low battery level 52 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 57 Disk Defragmenter 56 memory card reader, identifying 6, 18, 35 microphone, connecting 36 microphones, identifying 9, 35 minimized image creating 69 minimized image recovery 69 mouse, external setting preferences 41 mute light, identifying 13 O operating environment 71 original system recovery 69 74 Index P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 61 Windows 61 ports docking 6 HDMI 19, 35, 39 USB 3.0 19, 35 power battery 51 power button, identifying 7, 17 power connector, identifying 6, 19 product name and number, computer 20 public WLAN connection 31 R recovery discs 67, 70 HP Recovery Manager 69 media 70 options 68 starting 70 supported discs 67 system 69 USB flash drive 70 using HP Recovery media 68 recovery media creating 67 creating using HP Recovery Manager 68 recovery partition removing 70 regulatory information 20 releasing the tablet 20 restore Windows File History 68 right-edge swipe 25 rotating TouchPad gesture 44 S scrolling TouchPad gesture 43 security, wireless 30 serial number 20 serial number, computer 20 setting password protection on wakeup 50 setup of WLAN 30 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 61 shipping the computer 58 shutdown 54 SIM slot, identifying 6 Sleep exiting 50 initiating 50 slots memory card reader 6, 18, 35 SIM 6 software Disk Cleanup 57 Disk Defragmenter 56 software updates, installing 63 speakers connecting 36 identifying 9, 35 supported discs recovery 67 system recovery 69 system restore point creating 67 T tablet release latch, identifying 11 tablet screen brightness 21 tablet settings, changing 20 tablet view, changing 20 testing an AC adapter 53 Touch screen using 21 Touch screen gestures 25, 26 edgeswipe gestures 25 one-finger slide 21 rotating 24 scrolling 23 tapping 23 TouchPad buttons 12 identifying 12 TouchPad gestures 2-finger pinch zoom 24, 43 rotating 44 scrolling 43 TouchPad zone, identifying 12 TPM Embedded Security 61 traveling with the computer 58 turning off the computer 54 U unresponsive system 54 USB 3.0 port, identifying 19 USB 3.0 ports, identifying 35 using external AC power 53 using passwords 60 V video 38 volume button, identifying 7, 33 W warranty period 20 webcam 36 webcam light, identifying 9, 35 webcam, identifying 7, 9, 34, 35 Windows File History 68 restoring files 68 system restore point 67 Windows button, identifying 10 Windows key, identifying 15 Windows passwords 61 Wireless Assistant software 28 wireless button 28 wireless certification information 20 wireless controls button 28 operating system 28 Wireless Assistant software 28 wireless light 28 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 31 corporate WLAN connection 31 equipment needed 30 functional range 31 public WLAN connection 31 security 30 using 29 wireless network, securing 63 WLAN antennas, identifying 9 WLAN device 29 Index 75

Introduction: Broadcom BCM943142Y Wireless Communication Device User's Guide Before you begin Things you should know BCM943142Y network Before you begin Obtain the following information from your network administrator (if you are a home user, obtain this information from the person that installed your wireless access point):

l Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks that you want to connect to. l WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks you want to connect to. l For Microsoft Windows networking, your customer name and workgroup name. l For your network account, your user name and password. l Your IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Things you should know When you start your computer, your Broadcom BCM943142Y card detects certain wireless networks that are within range. Before you can connect to these and other wireless networks, you must configure a profile for each network using the information you obtained from your network administrator. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in the IEEE 802.11g standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network you are connecting to has enabled WEP, you must also enable WEP in the network profile and set the WEP key to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, you cannot connect to the network. Broadcom BCM943142Y network The Broadcom BCM943142Y solution allows you to make a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated below. Back to top Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Back to Contents Page Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Overview Utility Components Overview The Broadcom Wireless Utility enables you to do the following network tasks:

l Manage your wireless networks and create network connection profiles (Wireless Networks tab) l Connect to available networks (utility icon in notification area) l Get information about the network status and signal and noise of your network connection (Link Status tab) l View current and accumulated statistics (Statistics tab) l Find out which broadcasting networks are in range and search for nonbroadcasting networks (Site Monitor tab) l Run tests on the wireless network adapter (Diagnostics tab) l Get date and version information about the utility, and software, hardware, and location details about your wireless network adapter (Information tab) l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes (Wireless Networks tab) l Manually import EAP-FAST PACs (Wireless Networks tab) In the utility, you can open Wireless Network Wizard to connect to a basic network or create an ad hoc network, or you can open the Wireless Network Connection Settings tool to connect to an advanced network. To do any of the other tasks, click the tab that is associated with the described task. To start using the utility, right-click the utility icon If the icon is not available, open Broadcom Wireless Utility in Control Panel. in the notification area, and then click Open Utility. NOTE: The utility icon may not appear exactly as shown here. See "Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon."

Utility Components Utility components include the utility icon in the notification area, the six utility tabs, and Wireless Network Connection Settings. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (1 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Utility Icon To do any of the following tasks or operations, right-click the utility icon, and then click the appropriate item. l Open the on-line Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide

(Help Files) l Open About WLAN Card Utility to view links to Broadcom and Broadcom Customer Support websites and to view the version and date of the utility (About) l Hide the utility icon (Hide Tray Icon) l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Connect to any of the networks for which you have created a connection profile and are within range (Connect To) l Open the utility to the Wireless Networks tab (Open Utility) l Open the utility to the Link Status tab to view information about the connection (Status) l Display a log of your wireless network events (Display Log) Wireless Networks Tab The Wireless Networks tab has tools that enable you to do the following:

l Use the utility to manage your wireless networks l Add a network connection profile l Edit or remove a network connection profile l Change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections l Connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list l Disable or enable the radio (Disable/Enable Radio) l Show or hide the utility icon in the notification area l Choose which type of network to access l Lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile l Save your wireless network connection profiles as a WPN file l Import a WPN file l Manually add or delete trusted servers and enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes l Manually import EAP-FAST PACS On the Add menu, you can use either the wireless network wizard that is available from Broadcom Wireless Utility (see Connecting to a Basic Network or Creating an Ad Hoc Network Using the Wireless Network Wizard") or the utility (see "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility") to add a network connection profile. To use the utility to manage your wireless networks, select the Let this tool manage your wireless networks check box. To add a network connection profile, click the Add arrow, and then click either Use Wizard (basic network) or Use Utility (advanced network). To edit or remove a network connection profile, right-click the network name, and then click either Edit or Remove. To change the order in which profiles are listed under Preferred network connections, click the network name, and then click either the up arrow or down arrow. To connect to any listed network without changing its order in the list, right-click the network name, and then click Connect. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (2 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide To disable the radio, clear the Enable radio check box. To enable the radio, select the Enable radio check box. To hide the utility icon utility icon check box.

, clear the Show utility icon check box. To show the icon, select the Show To choose the type of network to access, click the Options arrow, and then click Advanced. To lock or unlock a preferred network connection profile, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the network name, and then click Lock or Unlock, as appropriate. NOTE: You must have system or administrator rights to be able to lock or unlock a profile. To save your wireless network connection profiles to a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Export (see "Saving Preferred Network Connection Settings to a File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."

To import a WPN file, click the Options arrow, and then click Import (see "Importing a Preferred Network Connection Profiles File" in "Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility."

Click Apply or OK after you change any of the settings for the change to take effect. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (3 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide For networks that use the EAP-FAST authentication method, the Wireless WLAN Card Utility automatically adds trusted servers to the trust list and accepts auto-provisioning and AID (A-ID) group changes by default. The utility also enables you to import a Protected Access Credential (PAC). From the utility, you can also manually add or delete trusted servers, enable the manual acceptance or rejection of auto-

provisioning and A-ID group changes, or import or delete PACS, as described in the following instructions. In general, you should use the default settings. Therefore, check with the network administrator before you make any changes. To manually add a trusted server to the trust list 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Click Add. 4. Type the A-ID friendly name of the trusted server in the space provided, and then click OK. To delete a trusted server from the trust list file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (4 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. In the Trust list (A-ID), click the name of the trusted server you want to delete, and then click Delete. To change the default settings for administering Cisco Compatible Extensions 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and then click Administrator Settings. 3. Clear the Disable auto-provision prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or rejection. 4. Clear the Disable A-ID group change prompt check box to enable manual acceptance or 5. Select the Auto-provision PAC only once check box to auto-provision a Protected Access rejection. Credential (PAC) only once. To import or remove an EAP-FAST PAC 1. Open Broadcom Wireless Utility. 2. From the Wireless Networks tab, click Options, point to Cisco Compatible Extensions, and 3. To import a PAC: in Protected Access Credentials, click Add, and then follow the on-screen then click Manage PACs. instructions. NOTE: The PAC is password protected, so you must know the password to be able to import the PAC.

-or-

To remove a PAC: click anywhere in the row that lists the PAC, and then click Remove. Link Status Network status and signal and noise information about your network connection is displayed on the Link Status tab. NOTES:

l For IEEE 802.11n connections, speed is indicated by an MCS value. l Radio Stream information is provided only for IEEE 802.11n connections. l Click anywhere in the Signal & noise history box to change the type of history being displayed. Successive clicks change the type from both signal and noise, to noise only, to signal only, and back to both signal and noise. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (5 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The status of your network connection is also indicated by the appearance of the utility icon number and color of the radio waves indicates the strength or weakness of the signal (see Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon for details). The To view the network name (SSID), speed, signal strength rating, connection status, and the client IP address of the network connection, move your mouse pointer over the utility icon. NOTE: On computers running Windows XP, you also can view the SSID, speed, signal strength rating, and connection status by moving your mouse pointer over the Windows Wireless Network Connection icon in the notification area. Table 1. Signal Strength Indicated by the Broadcom Wireless Utility Icon file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (6 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Icon Appearance Indicated Received Signal Strength The signal strength is very good or excellent. The signal strength is weak. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. No signal is being received. See Troubleshooting for probable causes and suggested action. The radio is disabled or switched off. See Troubleshooting for suggested action. Statistics On the Statistics tab under Current, the following current statistics are shown:

l Network name (SSID) l Connection time l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost l Total packets lost (%) Under Accumulated, the following accumulated statistics are shown:

l Packets sent l Packets received l Sent packets lost l Received packets lost file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (7 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide Site Monitor Basic Site Monitor On the Site Monitor tab, the basic Site Monitor displays information about wireless routers/APs and ad hoc networks that are within range. To sort the list, click the column heading that shows the characteristic you want to sort by. For example, to sort by signal strength, click Signal . To view information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network. The network information is shown under Selected Network. To view or change the network connection settings for a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Editif you have not yet created a network connection profile for that particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network and want to do so, click Add . To see the information elements for a listed AP or ad hoc network, right-click anywhere in the row that lists the AP or ad hoc network, and then click Show Information Elements. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (8 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide NOTES:

l Nonbroadcasting networks are labeled (nonbroadcasting) under Network Name. l The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting APs to which you are not currently connected. l The symbols under AP Band indicate IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, or IEEE 802.11n operation. To see more detailed information about a particular wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, click anywhere in the row that lists the wireless router/AP or ad hoc network, and then click Advanced. Advanced Site Monitor To save the activity log to a file, click the Options arrow, and then click Start Log. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (9 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide You can adjust the time interval between scans by clicking the Options arrow, and then clicking either one of the preset values or clicking Customize to specify a different time interval. NOTE: The network performance may be degraded while Site Monitor is displaying nonbroadcasting networks to which you are not currently connected. To view detailed network information for a single nonbroadcasting network, type the network name in the Look for box, and then click Find. To reset the site monitor to the broadcasting networks, click Clear. Diagnostics On the Diagnostics tab, you can run a number of tests to determine if your wireless network adapter is functioning properly. Select the tests you want to run, and then click Run. For information about an individual test, look under Information before you click Run. To see the test results, look under Information after you click Run. NOTE: The network connection is lost when you run the tests. When the test run is over, your network connection is automatically reestablished. Also, you can view a log of your wireless network events. To do so, click Log. Examples of wireless network events that are logged include:

file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (10 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide l Initiation of user session l Connecting to a network l Disconnecting from current network l Authentication mode being used l Driver status l Supplicant status l New wireless device available l Initializing wireless state machine l Wireless utility is managing this adapter l Wireless utility is not managing this adapter If your Broadcom 802.11 Network Adapter fails any of the diagnostics tests, go to http://www.broadcom. com/ for technical support. Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (11 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility: Broadcom AirForce 54g and Intensi-fi Wireless Network Adapter User Guide The following information is displayed on the Information tab:

l Software details l Hardware details l Location details (shows the country for which the driver is installed and the channels supported for that location) Wireless Network Connection Settings The Wireless Network Connection Settings component is intended for use by advanced users or network administrators. You can use Wireless Network Connection Settings to create a connection profile for an advanced infrastructure network, a basic infrastructure network, or an ad hoc network (see " Connecting to an Advanced Network Using the Broadcom Wireless Utility"). Back to Contents Page file:///P|/User%20Manuals/WLANCard-UM302_LaLa/HTML/utility.htm (12 of 12)4/25/2006 1:57:41 PM Using the Broadcom BT Utility: Quick Start Guide Installing the Software NOTE: This installation is required before you

. If the Main Menu screen appears automatically, select Install software and click OK. If the Main Menu screen does not appear automatically, click Start, click Run, type x:\setup.exe (where x is the CD-ROM or DVD drive letter of your computer), and click OK. Click Next, click Finish, and then restart your computer.

. Right-click the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar notification area (system tray) and click Start Using Bluetooth. Follow the instructions provided by the Initial Bluetooth Configuration Wizard. NOTE: Before you begin, however, please review the Users Guide. This document provides important information and instructions that will help you do the things you want to do with your Bluetooth enabled computer. Glossary Authentication A Bluetooth security feature that is used to verify identity; it requires a Bluetooth PIN Code from the remote device. Authorization A Yes-or-No Bluetooth security feature that requires operator intervention to avoid having the connection time out and fail. Bluetooth device Bluetooth enabled hardware such as a computer, printer, fax, mouse, keyboard, cell phone, headset, or PDA. Bluetooth PIN Code The alphanumeric string (up to 16 characters) that is typed to respond to a Bluetooth PIN Code Request. Also referred to as a Passkey. Bluetooth A short-range (9.14 meters/30 feet) networking protocol that allows enabled devices to automatically recognize each other. Bluetooth wireless technology allows quick and easy connectivity of Bluetooth enabled devices. Client Applications Software applications on this computer that allow this computer to use the Bluetooth services provided by remote Bluetooth devices. Link Key An internally generated unique security key (based on a Passkey, the Bluetooth Device Address, and an internally generated random number) that is exchanged by paired devices as proof of identity before a connection is established. Local Services Services that this computer provides to other Bluetooth devices. Paired Devices Bluetooth devices must be paired before they can connect. Paired devices share a unique Link Key, which they exchange each time they connect. Secure Connection A setting that requires a Passkey or Link Key each time you attempt to make a connection. All data exchanged over the Bluetooth connection is encrypted. Depending on other configuration options, authorization may also be required. Please refer to Broadcom OEM installation guide Regulatory Statements for BCM943142Y

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: October 2014 First Edition: June 2014 Document Part Number: 786097-002 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients and personal workstations. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers .................................................................................................... 1 Accessing regulatory labels .................................................................................................................................. 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 2 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ................. 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................ 3 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union regulatory notices ...................................................................................................................... 4 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 4 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) ...................................................................... 5 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality ....................................................... 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................ 5 Germany (English text) ................................................................................... 5 Germany (Deutscher text) .............................................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................. 6 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ..................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ............................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................................. 9 U.S. modem statements ................................................................................................................... 10 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 11 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 v Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Power cord notice ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 13 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................................... 13 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................................... 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ........................................................ 14 Modem notices .................................................................................................................................................... 14 Telecommunications device approvals ............................................................................................ 14 U.S. modem statements ................................................................................................................... 14 Canadian modem statements ........................................................................................................... 15 Japanese modem statements .......................................................................................................... 15 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 16 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 16 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ............................................................................................................... 16 Federal Communications Commission notice .................................................................................. 17 Modifications ................................................................................................................... 17 Cables .............................................................................................................................. 17 Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ................................................................................................................................ 17 Products with wireless LAN devices ............................................................................... 17 Australia telecom statement ............................................................................................................ 18 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................................. 19 European Union regulatory notices .................................................................................................. 19 Declaration of Conformity .............................................................................................. 19 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) ................................................. 19 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality ................................... 20 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ............................ 20 Ergonomics notice ........................................................................................ 20 Japan notice ...................................................................................................................................... 20 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings ...................................................... 20 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................................... 20 Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................................... 21 Taiwan NCC notices ........................................................................................................................... 21 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ........................................................................................ 21 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ......................... 22 vi 3 Safety notices for notebook computers ......................................................................................................... 23 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 23 Potential safety conditions notice ...................................................................................................................... 23 User-replaceable battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................................... 24 Power cord notices .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 Cleaning the keyboard ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 24 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................ 25 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 25 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 25 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 25 Taiwan BSMI notice .............................................................................................................................................. 25 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ............................................................... 26 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 26 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 26 Battery replacement notice ................................................................................................................................ 27 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................................... 27 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 28 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 28 Power supply class I grounding requirements ................................................................................. 28 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 28 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 28 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 28 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 28 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 28 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 28 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 29 Power cord set requirements ........................................................................................................... 29 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 29 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 29 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 30 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 30 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 30 Note to CATV system installer .......................................................................................................... 30 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................ 31 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 31 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 31 Germany acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................... 32 vii Taiwan BSMI notice .............................................................................................................................................. 32 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers ............................................................................................ 33 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ...................................................................................... 33 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 33 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 33 Brazil hardware recycling information ............................................................................................................... 34 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) .............................................................................................. 34 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 35 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 35 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 35 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 38 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 41 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 41 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................................... 41 Turkey EEE regulation ......................................................................................................................................... 41 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ......................................................................................... 41 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ........................................................................................... 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ................................................... 42 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ...................................................................................... 42 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 42 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 42 Brazil hardware recycling information ............................................................................................................... 43 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) .............................................................................................. 43 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 44 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 44 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 44 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 44 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 45 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 48 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content .................................................. 49 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 50 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 50 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 50 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) .... 50 Turkey EEE regulation ......................................................................................................................................... 51

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances

(RoHS)) ................................................................................................................................................................. 51 TCO Certified Edge Certification .......................................................................................................................... 51 viii Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 53 ix x 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select models only), under the removable service door (select models only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) for radio modules in your computer. Electronic labels can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Accessing regulatory labels 1 Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Brazil notice 3 Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions, but a minimum distance of 1 cm should be maintained from the antennas. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. European Union regulatory notices 5 Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Japan notice Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notices B ( )

(B) ,

.

(

).

, 2.5cm

. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Singapore wireless notice 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of Laser compliance 9 that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Power cord notice 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. 14 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

Modem notices 15 New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous 16 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding the product, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Or, call (281) 514-3333. To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 17 WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. 18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 19 This product may incorporate a radio transmitting and receiving device. For desktop computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable German ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-mouse and monitor. Germany (Deutscher text) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Japan notice B VCCI-B Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. South Korea notices B ( ) 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations

(B) ,

.

(

). 20cm . This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and personnel. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices 22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 3 Safety notices for notebook computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Heat-related safety warning notice 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan BSMI notice BSMI 1. 30 10 2. 2 2 1 China safety notices 25 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, CAUTION:

the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/

region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950). Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. 26 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery replacement notice WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:

Do not attempt to recharge the battery. Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. For information about removing a battery, refer to your computer documentation. Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. If the computer includes a headset or earphones and bears the "GS" mark, this combination is in compliance with EN 50332-1. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with these products should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. Battery replacement notice 27 Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or a Hewlett-Packard authorized replacement. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on 28 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from Hewlett-Packard. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/

index.pl. For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power cord set requirements The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from Hewlett-Packard or an approved HP source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. 2. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m (6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. Pinch hazard 29 TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 4-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. China safety notices 31 Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address:

http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Taiwan BSMI notice BSMI 1. 30 10 2. 2 2 1 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling 33 Brazil hardware recycling information HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers::

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 34 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

:

(, ) ,,,

,,,, (http://

www.sepa.gov.cn), 3

:

China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers

(CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. Chemical substances 35 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB28380 2012:

1.

() A B C D A B C 1 2 3 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128

. CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 China PC energy label 37 GB28380-2012 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead (Pb) USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards X X X X X Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) (PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 39

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) (PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O: GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS

:

40 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration

(components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar 42 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Brazil hardware recycling information HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers::

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. Brazil hardware recycling information 43 Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This statement applies to All-in-One computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html 44 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

:

(, ) ,,,

,,,, (http://

www.sepa.gov.cn), 3

:

China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers

(CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

China PC energy label 45 Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB28380 2012:

1.

() A B C D A B C 1 2 3 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 46 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128

. CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 GB28380-2012 China PC energy label 47 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 48 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content I/O PCAs

/

/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 49 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin

(componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration

(components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. 50 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS))

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. TCO Certified Edge Certification This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. Turkey EEE regulation 51 52 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Index A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 25, 31 B battery notice 8, 23, 41 battery recycling 33 Brazil notice 3 C cable grounding notice 25 Canada modem statement 12 Canada notices 4 China environmental notices 35, 44 China PC energy label 35, 45 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 38, 48 D Declaration of Conformity notebook computers 3 disposal notices battery 41 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 33 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 33 ENERGY STAR certification 34, 43 environmental notices 33 equipment disposal notice 33 ergonomics notice 5, 20 European Union notices 4, 19 F Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients and workstations notice 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 17 notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications notebook computers notice 2 Commission 2 G GS Notice 5, 20 H headset and earphone volume level notice 24 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 50 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 13 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 50 K keyboard notice 24 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 9 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law 41 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 9 modem statements Canada 12 Japan 12 New Zealand 12 U.S. 10 modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 N New Zealand modem statement 12 notices airline travel 8 battery 8, 41 battery, user replacement 23 Brazil 3 Canada 4 China restriction of hazardous substances 38, 48 environmental 33 equipment disposal 33 ergonomics 5, 20 European Union 4, 19 headset and earphone volume level 24 India restriction of hazardous substances 41, 50 Japan 6 Japan power cord 13 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 41, 50 keyboard 24 laser safety 9 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 6 modem 9 perchlorate material 41 power cords 13, 24 Singapore 7 South Korea 6 Taiwan 7, 21 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7 travel 24 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 41, 51 notices, desktops, thin clients and workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 Index 53 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 P power cord notice 13, 24 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 33 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 6 T Taiwan notice 7, 21 TCO Certified Edge Certification 51 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7 travel notice 24 tropical warning notice 25, 31 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 25 U U.S. modem statement 10 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 51 V voice support 13 volume level notice, headset and earphone 24 W wireless LAN devices 3, 18, 19 54 Index

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: October 2014 First Edition: June 2014 Document Part Number: 786097-002 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients and personal workstations. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers .................................................................................................... 1 Accessing regulatory labels .................................................................................................................................. 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 2 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ................. 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................ 3 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union regulatory notices ...................................................................................................................... 4 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 4 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) ...................................................................... 5 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality ....................................................... 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................ 5 Germany (English text) ................................................................................... 5 Germany (Deutscher text) .............................................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................. 6 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ..................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ............................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 9 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................................. 9 U.S. modem statements ................................................................................................................... 10 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 11 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 v Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Power cord notice ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 13 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................................... 13 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................................... 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ........................................................ 14 Modem notices .................................................................................................................................................... 14 Telecommunications device approvals ............................................................................................ 14 U.S. modem statements ................................................................................................................... 14 Canadian modem statements ........................................................................................................... 15 Japanese modem statements .......................................................................................................... 15 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 16 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 16 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ............................................................................................................... 16 Federal Communications Commission notice .................................................................................. 17 Modifications ................................................................................................................... 17 Cables .............................................................................................................................. 17 Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ................................................................................................................................ 17 Products with wireless LAN devices ............................................................................... 17 Australia telecom statement ............................................................................................................ 18 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................................. 19 European Union regulatory notices .................................................................................................. 19 Declaration of Conformity .............................................................................................. 19 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) ................................................. 19 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality ................................... 20 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ............................ 20 Ergonomics notice ........................................................................................ 20 Japan notice ...................................................................................................................................... 20 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings ...................................................... 20 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................................... 20 Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................................... 21 Taiwan NCC notices ........................................................................................................................... 21 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ........................................................................................ 21 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ......................... 22 vi 3 Safety notices for notebook computers ......................................................................................................... 23 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 23 Potential safety conditions notice ...................................................................................................................... 23 User-replaceable battery notices ....................................................................................................................... 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................................... 24 Power cord notices .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 Cleaning the keyboard ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 24 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................ 25 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 25 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 25 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 25 Taiwan BSMI notice .............................................................................................................................................. 25 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ............................................................... 26 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 26 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 26 Battery replacement notice ................................................................................................................................ 27 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................................... 27 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 28 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 28 Power supply class I grounding requirements ................................................................................. 28 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 28 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 28 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 28 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 28 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 28 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 28 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 29 Power cord set requirements ........................................................................................................... 29 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 29 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 29 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 30 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 30 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 30 Note to CATV system installer .......................................................................................................... 30 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................ 31 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 31 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 31 Germany acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................... 32 vii Taiwan BSMI notice .............................................................................................................................................. 32 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers ............................................................................................ 33 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ...................................................................................... 33 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 33 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 33 Brazil hardware recycling information ............................................................................................................... 34 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) .............................................................................................. 34 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 35 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 35 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 35 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 38 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 41 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 41 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................................... 41 Turkey EEE regulation ......................................................................................................................................... 41 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ......................................................................................... 41 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ........................................................................................... 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ................................................... 42 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ...................................................................................... 42 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 42 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 42 Brazil hardware recycling information ............................................................................................................... 43 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) .............................................................................................. 43 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 44 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 44 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 44 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 44 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 45 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 48 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content .................................................. 49 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 50 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 50 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 50 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) .... 50 Turkey EEE regulation ......................................................................................................................................... 51

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances

(RoHS)) ................................................................................................................................................................. 51 TCO Certified Edge Certification .......................................................................................................................... 51 viii Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 53 ix x 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select models only), under the removable service door (select models only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) for radio modules in your computer. Electronic labels can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Accessing regulatory labels 1 Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Brazil notice 3 Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions, but a minimum distance of 1 cm should be maintained from the antennas. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. European Union regulatory notices 5 Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Japan notice Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notices B ( )

(B) ,

.

(

).

, 2.5cm

. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Singapore wireless notice 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of Laser compliance 9 that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Power cord notice 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. 14 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

Modem notices 15 New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous 16 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding the product, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Or, call (281) 514-3333. To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 17 WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. 18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 19 This product may incorporate a radio transmitting and receiving device. For desktop computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable German ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-mouse and monitor. Germany (Deutscher text) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Japan notice B VCCI-B Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. South Korea notices B ( ) 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations

(B) ,

.

(

). 20cm . This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and personnel. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices 22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 3 Safety notices for notebook computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Heat-related safety warning notice 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 24 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan BSMI notice BSMI 1. 30 10 2. 2 2 1 China safety notices 25 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, CAUTION:

the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/

region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950). Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. 26 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery replacement notice WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:

Do not attempt to recharge the battery. Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. For information about removing a battery, refer to your computer documentation. Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. If the computer includes a headset or earphones and bears the "GS" mark, this combination is in compliance with EN 50332-1. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with these products should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. Battery replacement notice 27 Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or a Hewlett-Packard authorized replacement. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on 28 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from Hewlett-Packard. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/

index.pl. For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power cord set requirements The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from Hewlett-Packard or an approved HP source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. 2. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m (6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. Pinch hazard 29 TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 4-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. China safety notices 31 Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address:

http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Taiwan BSMI notice BSMI 1. 30 10 2. 2 2 1 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling 33 Brazil hardware recycling information HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers::

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 34 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

:

(, ) ,,,

,,,, (http://

www.sepa.gov.cn), 3

:

China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers

(CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. Chemical substances 35 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB28380 2012:

1.

() A B C D A B C 1 2 3 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128

. CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 China PC energy label 37 GB28380-2012 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead (Pb) USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards X X X X X Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) (PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 39

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI)) (PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O: GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS

:

40 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration

(components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar 42 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Brazil hardware recycling information HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers::

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. Brazil hardware recycling information 43 Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This statement applies to All-in-One computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html 44 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

:

(, ) ,,,

,,,, (http://

www.sepa.gov.cn), 3

:

China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers

(CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

China PC energy label 45 Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB28380 2012:

1.

() A B C D A B C 1 2 3 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 46 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128

. CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 GB28380-2012 China PC energy label 47 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 48 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content I/O PCAs

/

/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 49 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin

(componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration

(components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. 50 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS))

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. TCO Certified Edge Certification This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. Turkey EEE regulation 51 52 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Index A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 25, 31 B battery notice 8, 23, 41 battery recycling 33 Brazil notice 3 C cable grounding notice 25 Canada modem statement 12 Canada notices 4 China environmental notices 35, 44 China PC energy label 35, 45 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 38, 48 D Declaration of Conformity notebook computers 3 disposal notices battery 41 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 33 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 33 ENERGY STAR certification 34, 43 environmental notices 33 equipment disposal notice 33 ergonomics notice 5, 20 European Union notices 4, 19 F Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients and workstations notice 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 17 notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications notebook computers notice 2 Commission 2 G GS Notice 5, 20 H headset and earphone volume level notice 24 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 50 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 13 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 50 K keyboard notice 24 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 9 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law 41 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 9 modem statements Canada 12 Japan 12 New Zealand 12 U.S. 10 modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 N New Zealand modem statement 12 notices airline travel 8 battery 8, 41 battery, user replacement 23 Brazil 3 Canada 4 China restriction of hazardous substances 38, 48 environmental 33 equipment disposal 33 ergonomics 5, 20 European Union 4, 19 headset and earphone volume level 24 India restriction of hazardous substances 41, 50 Japan 6 Japan power cord 13 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 41, 50 keyboard 24 laser safety 9 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 6 modem 9 perchlorate material 41 power cords 13, 24 Singapore 7 South Korea 6 Taiwan 7, 21 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7 travel 24 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 41, 51 notices, desktops, thin clients and workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 Index 53 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 P power cord notice 13, 24 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 33 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 6 T Taiwan notice 7, 21 TCO Certified Edge Certification 51 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7 travel notice 24 tropical warning notice 25, 31 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 25 U U.S. modem statement 10 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 51 V voice support 13 volume level notice, headset and earphone 24 W wireless LAN devices 3, 18, 19 54 Index



Lenovo Flex 3 Flex 3-1120/Flex 3-1130 User Guide

  

Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 8.1. If you are using another Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice For details, refer to Guides & Manuals at http://support.lenovo.com. First Edition (February 2015) Copyright Lenovo 2015. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer ......................................... 1 Top view ..................................................................................................................... 1 Left-side view ............................................................................................................ 8 Right-side view ........................................................................................................ 13 Bottom view ............................................................................................................. 16 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 ............................................17 Configuring the operating system for the first time .......................................... 17 Operating system interfaces .................................................................................. 17 The charms ............................................................................................................... 18 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down ............................................ 21 Touch screen operation .......................................................................................... 24 Connecting to a wireless network ........................................................................ 28 Help and support .................................................................................................... 29 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery system .................................. 30 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting ................................................................32 Frequently asked questions ................................................................................... 32 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................... 35 Trademarks ........................................................................................... 38 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ab e c d Note: The dashed areas indicate parts that are not visible externally. Attention:

When closing the display panel, be careful not to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a Integrated camera (on select models) b Built-in microphones c Multi-touch screen d Touch pad Use the camera for video communication. Capture sound which can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or audio recording. The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant visual output. Multi-touch function is available on this display. The touch pad functions as a conventional mouse. Touch pad: To move the pointer on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the pointer to move. Touch pad buttons: The functions of the left/right side correspond to those of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Note: You can enable/disable the touch pad by pressing F6 (

). e Wireless LAN antennas Connect to a wireless LAN adapter to send and receive wireless radio signals. 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using the keyboard Hotkeys You can access certain system settings quickly by pressing the appropriate hotkeys.

:

:

:

:

:

:

Mutes/unmutes the sound. Decreases the volume level. Increases the volume level. Closes the currently active window. Refreshes the desktop or the currently active window. Enables/disables the touch pad.

:

:

:

:

:

:

Enables/disables Airplane mode. Displays all currently active apps. Turns on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Toggles the display between the computer and an external device. Decreases display brightness. Increases display brightness. Note: If you changed the Hotkey Mode from Enabled to Disabled in the BIOS setup utility, you will need to press the Fn key in combination with the appropriate hotkey. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Function key combinations Through the use of the function keys, you can change operational features instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn a; then press one of the function keys b. a The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + PgUp:

Activates the Home function. Activates the End function. Fn + PgDn:

b 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Positioning the display panel The display panel can be opened to any angle up to 360 degrees. Notebook Mode Suitable for tasks that require a keyboard and mouse (such as creating documents, writing e-mails, and so on). 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Stand Mode (Theater Mode) Suitable for tasks that require little or no touch (such as viewing photos or playing videos). Tablet Mode Suitable for tasks that require touching the screen often (such as surfing the Web, playing games, and so on). 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Tent Mode (Presentation Mode) Suitable for tasks that require limited interaction with the touch screen (such as displaying graphs or PowerPoint presentations). Attention:

Do not open the display with too much force, otherwise the panel or hinges may be damaged. Note: The keyboard and touch pad are automatically locked when the screen is opened beyond 190 degrees (approximately). 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f g h a Kensington slot b AC power adapter jack Attach a security lock (not supplied) here to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use. You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Connects to the AC power adapter. c USB port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 11. d Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 12. e Combo audio Connects to headsets. jack Notes:

The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. The recording function may not be supported if third-party headphones or headsets are connected, due to different industry standards. 8 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer f Rotation lock button Keeps the screen locked in portrait or landscape orientation. Locking the screen rotation will disable the gravity sensing function, thereby preventing the screen from changing its orientation automatically depending upon the angle at which it is held. Note: The screen rotation lock button will be disabled in notebook mode. g Volume down Decreases the volume level. button h Volume up button Increases the volume level. 9 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Screen orientation You can rotate the display panel to your preferred orientation. The orientation of the display automatically changes (alternating between portrait and landscape modes) depending upon how you hold the computer. Portrait Landscape To prevent automatic orientation, press the rotation lock button. It is located on the right edge of the computer (See illustration below). Note: The screen rotation lock button will be disabled in notebook mode. 10 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting USB devices You can connect a USB device to your computer by inserting its USB plug

(Type A) into the USB port on your computer. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver has been installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after it has been connected, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data to that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the Windows notification area to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 11 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) card SD eXtended Capacity (SDXC) card MultiMediaCard (MMC) Notes:

This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Insert only one card in the slot at a time. Inserting a memory card Insert the memory card until it touches the bottom of the slot. Removing a memory card Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it by using the Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 12 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f a Battery status indicator b Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. and power status indicator Indicator Indicator status On (solid white) Solid amber Battery status indicator Fast blinking amber Slow blinking amber Slow blinking white Power status indicator On (solid white) Blinking Off Meaning The battery has more than 20% charge. The battery has between 5% and 20%

charge. The battery has less than 5% charge. The battery is being charged. When battery charge reaches 20%, the blinking color changes to white. The battery has between 20% and 80%

charge and is still charging. When the battery reaches 80% charge the light will stop blinking, but charging will continue until the battery is fully charged. The computer is powered on. The computer is in sleep mode. The computer is powered off. 13 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer c Novo button d USB port When the computer is off, press this button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system or the BIOS setup utility, or to enter the boot menu. Connects to USB devices. Notes:

If the battery charge is more than 20%, the USB port with a an external USB device, even when the computer is turned off. The blue port supports USB 3.0. For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 11. mark supports charging of e HDMI port f RJ-45 port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. Connects the computer to an Ethernet network. 14 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting network cables To insert a network cable, do the following:

1 Hold one connector of the network cable to press the RJ-45 cover down gently a. 2 Insert the connector into the RJ-45 port b. a b Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 15 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a Speakers Provide audio output. a 16 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Configuring the operating system for the first time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below:

Accepting the end user license agreement Configuring the Internet connection Registering the operating system Creating a user account Operating system interfaces - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Windows 8.1 comes with two main user interfaces: the Start screen and the Windows desktop. To switch from the Start screen to the Windows desktop, do one of the following:

Select the Windows desktop tile on the Start screen. Press the Windows button. Press the Windows key

+ D. To switch from the desktop to the Start screen, do one of the following:

Select Start from the charms bar. Press the Windows key Move the cursor to the lower-left corner, and then select the Start button. Start screen Desktop 17 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 The charms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Charms are navigation buttons that let you control your Windows 8.1 experience. Charms include: Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings. The charms bar is the menu that contains the charms. The five charms provide new and faster ways to perform many basic tasks, and are always available regardless of whichever app you are currently in. To display the charms, do one of the following:

Move the cursor to the upper-right or lower-right corner until the charms bar is displayed. Use one finger to swipe in from the right edge of the screen until the charms bar is displayed. Press the Windows key

+ C. 18 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Search charm The Search charm is a powerful new way to find what you are looking for, including settings, files, Web images, Web videos, etc. Share charm The Share charm lets you send links, photos, and more to your friends and social networks without leaving the app you are in. Start charm The Start charm is a fast way to go to the Start screen. Devices charm The Devices charm allows you to connect or send files to any external devices, including the devices to play, print, and project. 19 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Settings charm The Settings charm lets you perform basic tasks, such as setting the volume or shutting down the computer. Also, you can get to the Control Panel through the Settings charm when on the Desktop screen. 20 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

When you have finished working with your computer, you can put it to sleep or shut it down. Putting your computer to sleep If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer to sleep. When the computer is in sleep mode, you can quickly wake it to resume use, bypassing the startup process. To put the computer to sleep, do one of the following:

Close the display lid. Press the power button. Open the charms bar and then select Settings o Power o Sleep. Note: Put your computer to sleep before you move it. Moving your computer while the hard disk drive is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following:

Press any key on the keyboard. (Notebook mode only) Press the power button. Press the Windows button. 21 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Shutting down the computer If you are not going to use your computer for a long time, shut it down. To shut down your computer, do one of the following:

Open the charms bar and then select Settings o Power o Shut down. 22 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner and select Shut down or sign out o Shut down. On the Start screen, click and select Shut down. Note: This operation depends on your BIOS settings. Please refer to the actual product. 23 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Touch screen operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The display panel can accept inputs like a tablet, using the multi-touch screen, or like a traditional notebook computer, using the keyboard and touch pad. Multi-touch gestures You can touch the screen with one or more fingertips to perform a variety of tasks. Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Tap Tap once on an item. Performs an action, such as starting an app, opening a link, or performing a command. Similar to left-clicking with a mouse. Press and hold Press your finger down and leave it there for a moment. Allows you to see detailed information before selecting an action. Can also open a menu with more options. Similar to right-clicking with a mouse. 24 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Zoom Move two fingers together or apart while touching the screen. Zooms in and out on visual apps, such as pictures and maps. Can also jump to the beginning or end of a list. Rotate Place two or more fingers on an item and then turn your hand. Turns an object. (Note: Not all items can be rotated, depending upon the app.) Slide Drag your finger across the screen. Pans or scrolls through lists and pages. Can also move an object or be used to draw or write, depending upon the app. Similar to pressing and holding to pan and to scrolling with a mouse. 25 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swipe Start from any edge of the screen, then swipe inwards toward the center. Swiping down from the top edge or up from the bottom edge displays a task bar on the bottom of the screen with app commands, including New, Refresh, and other commands. If you have an app currently open, you can also:

Swipe from the top edge to halfway down the screen without lifting your finger to dock that app on the left or right side of the screen. This allows you to keep two apps open simultaneously in a split-screen format. Swipe from the top edge straight down to the bottom edge of the screen continuously without lifting your finger to close the currently open app. 26 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swiping in from the left edge can:

Bring in and open an app currently running in the background. If there is more than one currently open app, you can:

Swipe in from the left to bring in an app and, without lifting your finger, push that app quickly back off the left edge of the screen. This displays a list of the apps currently running in the background. Swiping in from the right edge of the screen displays the charms. 27 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Connecting to a wireless network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless functions, do one of the following:

Press Open the charms bar and select Settings to disable airplane mode. o to open the network configuration page. Then toggle the airplane mode switch to Off. Connecting to a wireless network After wireless has been enabled, the computer will automatically scan for available wireless networks and display them in the wireless network list. To connect to a wireless network, click the network name in the list, and then click Connect. Note: Some networks require a network security key or passphrase for connection. To connect to one of those networks, ask the network administrator or the Internet service provider (ISP) for the security key or passphrase. 28 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Help and support - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you have a problem with the operating system, see the Windows Help and Support file. To open the Windows Help and Support file, do one of the following:

Select Settings charm, then select Help. Press Fn + F1 (depending on your keyboard layout) You can read the Windows Help and Support file on your computer. You can also get online help and support by clicking on one of the two links listed under More to explore. Note: Windows 8.1 also provides an app, Help+Tips. You can find it on the Start screen, to learn more information on new features of Windows 8.1. 29 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery system The Lenovo OneKey Recovery system is software designed to back up and restore your computer. You can use it to restore the system partition to its original status in case of a system failure. You can also create user backups for easy restoration as required. Notes:

If your computer is preinstalled with a GNU/Linux operating system, OneKey Recovery system is not available. To utilize the features of the OneKey Recovery system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and the OneKey Recovery system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons, which explains why the available disk space is less than the stated capacity. Backing up the system partition You can back up the system partition to an image file. This image file can be used to restore the system partition. To back up the system partition:

1 In Windows, press the Novo button or double-click OneKey Recovery icon to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. 2 Click System Backup. 3 Select a back-up location and click Next to start the backup. Notes:

You can choose a back-up location on the local hard disk drive or an external storage device. Remove the removable hard disk drive before starting the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. Otherwise, data from the removable hard disk drive might be lost. The back-up process may take a while. The back-up process is only available when Windows can be started normally. 30 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery system Restoring You can choose to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. To restore the system partition:

1 In Windows, press the Novo button or double-click OneKey Recovery icon to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. 2 Click System Recovery. The computer will restart to the recovery environment. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. Notes:

The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any data you wish to save on the system partition before starting the recovery process. The recovery process may take a while. So be sure to connect the AC power adapter to your computer during the recovery process. The above instructions should be followed when Windows can be started normally. If Windows cannot be started, then follow the steps below to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button. From the Novo Button Menu, select System recovery and press Enter. 31 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions by category. Finding information What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

The Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide which came with your computer contains safety precautions for using your computer. Read and follow all the precautions when using your computer. Where can I find the hardware specifications for my computer?

You can find hardware specification for your computer on the printed flyers which came with your computer. Where can I find warranty information?

For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. Drivers and preinstalled software Where are the installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software (desktop software)?

Your computer did not come with installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software. If you need to reinstall any preinstalled software, first check the installation program on the C partition of your hard disk. If you cannot find the installation program there, you can also download it from the Lenovo consumer support website. Where can I find drivers for the various hardware devices of my computer?

If your computer is preinstalled with a Windows operating system, first check the installation program on the C partition of your hard disk. If you cannot find the drivers for all the hardware devices that you need there, download the drivers from the Lenovo consumer support website. 32 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Lenovo OneKey Recovery system Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with recovery discs. Use the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system if you need to restore the system to its factory status. What can I do if the back-up process fails?

If you can start the backup but it fails during the back-up process, try the following steps:

1 Close all open programs, and then restart the back-up process. 2 Check to see if the destination media is damaged. Select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to its factory status?

Use this feature when the operating system fails to start up. If there is critical data on the system partition, back it up before starting recovery. BIOS setup utility What is the BIOS setup utility?

The BIOS setup utility is ROM-based software. It displays basic computer information and provides options for setting boot devices, security, hardware mode, and other preferences. How can I start the BIOS setup utility?

To start the BIOS setup utility:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button and then select BIOS Setup. How can I change the boot mode?

There are two boot modes: UEFI and Legacy Support. To change the boot mode, start the BIOS setup utility and set boot mode to UEFI or Legacy Support on the boot menu. When do I need to change the boot mode?

The default boot mode for your computer is UEFI mode. If you need to install a legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc (that is, any operating system before Windows 8) on your computer, you must change the boot mode to Legacy Support. The legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc cannot be installed if you don't change the boot mode. 33 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Getting help How can I contact the customer support center?

See Chapter 3. Getting help and service in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 34 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. The screen goes blank while the computer is on. Sleep problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on. If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The AC power adapter is connected to the computer, and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. Press the Power button again for confirmation. If these items are set correctly, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to its original factory contents using the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced. Your power management is enabled. Do one of the following to resume from sleep mode:

- Press any key on the keyboard. (Notebook mode only)

- Press the Power button.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off. The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC power adapter to the computer. Make sure that:

- The battery is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 35 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting The computer does not return from sleep mode and the computer does not work. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC power adapter to the computer, then press the Windows button or the Power button. If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the Power button for eight seconds or more. If the computer still does not reset, remove the AC power adapter. Display panel problems The screen is blank. Do the following:

- If you are using the AC power adapter or the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press F12 (

) to make the screen brighter.

- If the power indicator is blinking, press the Power button to resume from sleep mode.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off.

- If the problem persists, follow the solution in the next problem The screen is unreadable or distorted. Make sure that:

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. Is the operating system or programs installed correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Incorrect characters appear on the screen. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speakers even when the volume is turned up. Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The combo audio jack is not being used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device. 36 Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. Other problems Your computer does not respond. The connected external device does not work. Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Recharge the battery. To turn off your computer, press and hold the Power button for eight seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC power adapter. Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on. Otherwise, you might damage your computer. When using high power consumption external devices, such as an external USB optical disk drive, use an external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or the system may shut down as a result. 37 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 38



L e n o v o C h n a 2 0 1 5 i en-US Rev. AA00 en-US Rev. AA00 Lenovo limited warranty L505-0010-02 08/2011 This Lenovo Limited Warranty consists of the following parts:

Part 1 - General Terms Part 2 - Country-specific Terms Part 3 - Warranty Service Information The terms of Part 2 replace or modify terms of Part 1 as specified for a particular country. Part 1 - General Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This Lenovo Limited Warranty applies only to Lenovo hardware products you purchased for your own use and not for resale. This Lenovo Limited Warranty is available in other languages at www.lenovo.com/warranty. What this Warranty Covers Lenovo warrants that each Lenovo hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase as shown on your sales receipt or invoice or as may be otherwise specified by Lenovo. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are as specified in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. This warranty only applies to products in the country or region of purchase. THIS WARRANTY IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE EXTENT AND FOR SUCH DURATION AS REQUIRED BY LAW AND ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION ON DURATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 1 Lenovo limited warranty How to Obtain Warranty Service If the product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, you may obtain warranty service by contacting Lenovo or a Lenovo approved Service Provider. A list of approved Service Providers and their telephone numbers is available at: www.lenovo.com/support/phone. Warranty service may not be available in all locations and may differ from location to location. Charges may apply outside a Service Provider's normal service area. Contact a local Service Provider for information specific to your location. Customer Responsibilities for Warranty Service Before warranty service is provided, you must take the following steps:

follow the service request procedures specified by the Service Provider backup or secure all programs and data contained in the product provide the Service Provider with all system keys or passwords provide the Service Provider with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to perform service remove all data, including confidential information, proprietary information and personal information, from the product or, if you are unable to remove any such information, modify the information to prevent its access by another party or so that it is not personal data under applicable law. The Service Provider shall not be responsible for the loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, on a product returned or accessed for warranty service remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not covered by the warranty its replacement ensure that the product or part is free of any legal restrictions that prevent if you are not the owner of a product or part, obtain authorization from the owner for the Service Provider to provide warranty service 2 Lenovo limited warranty What Your Service Provider Will Do to Correct Problems When you contact a Service Provider, you must follow the specified problem determination and resolution procedures. The Service Provider will attempt to diagnose and resolve your problem by telephone, e-mail or remote assistance. The Service Provider may direct you to download and install designated software updates. Some problems may be resolved with a replacement part that you install yourself called a Customer Replaceable Unit or CRU. If so, the Service Provider will ship the CRU to you for you to install. If your problem cannot be resolved over the telephone; through the application of software updates or the installation of a CRU, the Service Provider will arrange for service under the type of warranty service designated for the product under Part 3 - Warranty Service Information below. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to repair your product, the Service Provider will replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to either repair or replace your product, your sole remedy under this Limited Warranty is to return the product to your place of purchase or to Lenovo for a refund of your purchase price. Replacement Products and Parts When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovos property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. 3 Lenovo limited warranty Use of Personal Contact Information If you obtain service under this warranty, you authorize Lenovo to store, use and process information about your warranty service and your contact information, including name, phone numbers, address, and e-mail address. Lenovo may use this information to perform service under this warranty. We may contact you to inquire about your satisfaction with our warranty service or to notify you about any product recalls or safety issues. In accomplishing these purposes, you authorize Lenovo to transfer your information to any country where we do business and to provide it to entities acting on our behalf. We may also disclose it where required by law. Lenovo's privacy policy is available at www.lenovo.com/. What this Warranty Does not Cover This warranty does not cover the following:

uninterrupted or error-free operation of a product loss of, or damage to, your data by a product any software programs, whether provided with the product or installed subsequently failure or damage resulting from misuse, abuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, natural disasters, power surges, improper maintenance, or use not in accordance with product information materials damage caused by a non-authorized service provider failure of, or damage caused by, any third party products, including those that Lenovo may provide or integrate into the Lenovo product at your request any technical or other support, such as assistance with how-to questions and those regarding product set-up and installation products or parts with an altered identification label or from which the identification label has been removed Limitation of Liability Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. 4 Lenovo limited warranty UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY:

1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY (INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Your Other Rights THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS ACCORDING TO THE APPLICABLE LAWS OF YOUR STATE OR JURISDICTION. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER A WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LENOVO. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS, INCLUDING RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS UNDER LAWS OR REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF CONSUMER GOODS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. 5 Lenovo limited warranty Part 2 - Country-specific Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Australia Lenovo means Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: +61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

What this Warranty Covers:

Lenovo warrants that each hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and conditions during the warranty period. If the product fails due to a covered defect during the warranty period, Lenovo will provide you a remedy under this Limited Warranty. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase specified on your sales receipt or invoice unless Lenovo informs you otherwise in writing. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are set forth below in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information. THE BENEFITS GIVEN BY THIS WARRANTY ARE IN ADDITION TO YOUR RIGHTS AND REMEDIES AT LAW, INCLUDING THOSE UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Replacement Products and Parts:

When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovo's property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. Products and parts presented for repair may be replaced by refurbished products or parts of the same type rather than being repaired. Refurbished parts may be used to repair the product; and repair of the product may result in loss of data, if the product is capable of retaining user-generated data. 6 Lenovo limited warranty The following is added to the same section in Part 1:

Use of Personal Contact Information:

Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal contact information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1988 by contacting Lenovo. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Limitation of Liability:

Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. 7 Lenovo limited warranty THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY (INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Your Other Rights:

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS OR RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING RIGHTS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. For example, our products come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the products repaired or replaced if the products fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. New Zealand The following is added to the same section in Part 1:

Use of Personal Information:

Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1993 by contacting Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: 61 2 8003 8200. Email:

lensyd_au@lenovo.com Bangladesh, Cambodia, India, Indonesia, Nepal, Philippines, Vietnam and Sri Lanka The following is added to Part 1:

8 Lenovo limited warranty Dispute Resolution Disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Singapore. This warranty shall be governed, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of Singapore, without regard to conflict of laws. If you acquired the product in India, disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Bangalore, India. Arbitration in Singapore shall be held in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of Singapore International Arbitration Center

(SIAC Rules) then in effect. Arbitration in India shall be held in accordance with the laws of India then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding on the parties without appeal. Any award shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. All arbitration proceedings, including all documents presented in such proceedings shall be conducted in the English language. The English language version of this warranty prevails over any other language version in such proceedings. European Economic Area (EEA) The following is added to Part 1:

Customers in the EEA may contact Lenovo at the following address: EMEA Service Organisation, Lenovo (International) B.V., Floor 2, Einsteinova 21, 851 01, Bratislava, Slovakia. Service under this warranty for Lenovo hardware products purchased in EEA countries may be obtained in any EEA country in which the product has been announced and made available by Lenovo. Russia The following is added to Part 1:

Product Service Life The product service life is four (4) years from the original date of purchase. 9 Lenovo limited warranty Part 3 - Warranty Service Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period Types of warranty service Australia, NewZealand, Japan Austria, Lithuania, Latvia, France, Germany, Israel, Ireland, Italy, Switzerland, the United Kingdom, Iceland Hungary, Romania, Bulgaria Canada China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), China

(Macau S.A.R.), Singapore, Malaysia, Thailand, Vietnam, Indonesia, Philippines, India, Sri Lanka Greece, Poland, Serbia, Montenegro, Croatia, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Slovenia, Albania, Macedonia, Cyprus Mexico, Venezuela, Bolivia, Uruguay, Paraguay, Ecuador Colombia, Argentina, Chile, Peru Taiwan, Korea Russia, the Republic of Kazakhstan, Ukraine, Belarus, Georgia, Armenia, Uzbekistan, Tajikistan, Kyrgyzstan, Mongolia, Azerbaijan Moldova South Africa, Kenya, Nigeria, Uganda, Moroco, Tunisia, Algeria, CotedIvoire, Angola, United Arab Emirates, Bahrain, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Qatar, Botswana, Oman, Egypt, Pakistan, Cameroon, Democratic Republic of Congo, Djibouti, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iraq, Malta, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mozambique, Namibia, Rwanda, Senegal, Seychelles, Tanzania, Yemen, Zambia, Zimbabwe Brazil Belgium, Denmark, Finland, Estonia, Sweden, Norway, Netherlands, Spain, Portugal, Luxemburg Slovakia, Czech Republic Saudi Arabia parts and labor -

1 year battery pack -

1 year parts and labor -

2 years battery pack -

1 year 1, 3 1, 4 3, 4 4 2, 5 1, 3 4 Notebook:

80LX 80LY 10 Lenovo limited warranty Product or machine type Notebook:

80LX 80LY Country or region of purchase Warranty period Turkey United States of America parts and labor -

2 years battery pack -

2 years parts and labor -

1 year limited warranty*

battery pack -

1 year Types of warranty service 1, 4 1, 3

* Excludes some components. 90-day limited warranty for power adapters, keyboards, plastics and hinges. If required, the Service Provider will provide repair or exchange service depending on the type of warranty service specified for your product and the available service. Scheduling of service will depend upon the time of your call, parts availability, and other factors. Types of Warranty Service 1 Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) Service Under CRU Service, the Service Provider will ship CRUs to you at its cost for installation by you. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your product and are available from Lenovo at any time upon request. CRUs that are easily installed by you are called Self-service CRUs. Optional-service CRUs are CRUs that may require some technical skill and tools. Installation of Self-service CRUs is your responsibility. You may request that a Service Provider install Optional-service CRUs under one of the other types of warranty service designated for your product. An optional service offering may be available for purchase from a Service Provider or Lenovo under which Self-service CRUs would be installed for you. You may find a list of CRUs and their designation in the publication that was shipped with your product or at www.lenovo.com/CRUs. The requirement to return a defective CRU, if any, will be specified in the instructions shipped with a replacement CRU. When return is required: 1) return instructions, a prepaid return shipping label, and a container will be included with the replacement CRU; and 2) you may be charged for the replacement CRU if the Service Provider does not receive the defective CRU from you within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement CRU. 11 Lenovo limited warranty 2 On-site Service Under On-Site Service, a Service Provider will either repair or exchange the product at your location. You must provide a suitable working area to allow disassembly and reassembly of the product. Some repairs may need to be completed at a service center. If so, the Service Provider will send the product to the service center at its expense. 3 Courier or Depot Service Under Courier or Depot Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center, with shipping at the expense of the Service Provider. You are responsible for disconnecting the product and packing it in a shipping container provided to you to return your product to a designated service center. A courier will pick up your product and deliver it to the designated service center. The service center will return the product to you at its expense. 4 Customer Carry-In Service Under Customer Carry-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for collection. If you fail to collect the product, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 5 Mail-In Service Under Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center after you deliver it at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be returned to you at Lenovo's risk and expense, unless the Service Provider specifies otherwise. 6 Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service Under Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for return shipping at your risk and expense. If you fail to arrange return shipment, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 12 Lenovo limited warranty 7 Product Exchange Service Under Product Exchange Service, Lenovo will ship a replacement product to your location. You are responsible for its installation and verification of its operation. The replacement product becomes your property in exchange for the failed product, which becomes the property of Lenovo. You must pack the failed product in the shipping carton in which you received the replacement product and return it to Lenovo. Transportation charges, both ways, shall be at Lenovos expense. If you fail to use the carton in which the replacement product was received, you may be responsible for any damage to the failed product occurring during shipment. You may be charged for the replacement product if Lenovo does not receive the failed product within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement product. 13 Product specific Notices The notices in this appendix are specific to the product with the given MT numbers. Notices that are common for most Lenovo products are included in Appendix A. Notices of the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. ENERGY STAR information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if the ENERGY STAR mark is affixed, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers. 80LX 80LY By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power-management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, visit http://www.energystar.gov. Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when your computer has been inactive for a specified duration:

14 Product specific Notices Table 1. ENERGY STAR power-management features Windows 8.1 Power plan: balanced (plugged in) Turn off the display:

After 10 minutes Put the computer to sleep:

After 25 minutes Advanced power settings:

- Turn off hard disks:

After 20 minutes To awaken your computer from a sleep mode, press any key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, refer to your Windows Help and Support information system. 15 Product specific Notices Electronic emissions notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The following information refers to Lenovo Flex 3-1120/Flex 3-1130 , machine type 80LX, 80LY. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 16 3URGXFWVSHFLILF1RWLFHV















,QGXVWU\&DQDGD&ODVV%(PLVVLRQ&RPSOLDQFH6WDWHPHQW







   



 $YLVGHFRQIRUPLWpjODUpJOHPHQWDWLRQG,QGXVWULH&DQDGD







/H SUpVHQW DSSDUHLO HVW FRQIRUPH DX[ &15 G,QGXVWULH &DQDGD DSSOLFDEOHV DX[

DSSDUHLOV UDGLR H[HPSWV GH OLFHQFH /H[SORLWDWLRQ HVW DXWRULVpH DX[ GHX[

FRQGLWLRQV VXLYDQWHV   ODSSDUHLO QH GRLW SDV SURGXLUH GH EURXLOODJH HW 

OXWLOLVDWHXUGHODSSDUHLOGRLWDFFHSWHUWRXWEURXLOODJHUDGLRpOHFWULTXHVXELPrPHVL

OHEURXLOODJHHVWVXVFHSWLEOHGHQFRPSURPHWWUHOHIRQFWLRQQHPHQW

 *HUPDQ&ODVV%&RPSOLDQFH6WDWHPHQW











 







3URGXFWVSHFLILF1RWLFHV











































t















Product specific Notices European Union Compliance Statement Class B Compliance European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-

recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. EU Contact Address: Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia 19 Specifications Model Name: Lenovo Flex 3-1120/Flex 3-1130 Machine Type: 80LX, 80LY Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Lenovo reserves the right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Processor Appr. 299 mm 209 mm 21.8 mm Appr. 1.4 kg 11.6-inch See the system properties of your computer, you can do this as follows:

Click Control Panel, then click Hardware and Sound, click Device Manager under Devices and Printers and double click Processors. Memory Type and speed Maximum supported capacity DDR3L-1333 MHz 8 GB Hard disk drive (on select models) Storage (on select models) Form factor Capacity Interface 2.5-inch, 7 mm HDD: 250 GB/320 GB/

500 GB/1 TB SSHD: 500 GB+8 GB SATA 3

-

32 GB/64 GB eMMC 20 Specifications Display Display resolution

(LCD) Maximum display resolution on external display device Touch Screen LCD backlight I/O Ports USB Audio Communication Video/Audio Memory card slot Battery pack Type Cells/Capacity AC power adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera 16:9 (1,366 768 pixels) 1,366 768 pixels Multi-touch screen LED USB 3.0 1, USB 2.0 2 Combo audio jack 1 RJ-45 1 HDMI slot 1 4 in 1 slot 1 (SD/SDHC/SDXC/MMC) Li-Polymer 2 cells, 30 Wh 100-240 V, 50-60 Hz AC 20 V DC 45 W 0.3 Mega, HD 21 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 22

Lenovo Edge 15 User Guide en-US Rev. AA00 Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 8.1. If you are using other Windows operating systems, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations used in this manual are from Lenovo Edge 15 unless otherwise stated. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice For details, refer to Guides & Manuals at http://support.lenovo.com. First Edition (April 2014) Copyright Lenovo 2014. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer .......................................... 1 Topview.......................................................................................................................1 Leftsideview ..............................................................................................................7 Rightsideview............................................................................................................9 Bottomview ...............................................................................................................13 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 ............................................. 14 Configuringtheoperatingsystemforthefirsttime ............................................14 Operatingsysteminterfaces ....................................................................................14 Thecharms .................................................................................................................15 Puttingthecomputertosleeporshuttingit down ...........................................................................................................................17 Touchscreenoperation ............................................................................................20 Connectingtoawirelessnetwork ..........................................................................24 Helpandsupport ......................................................................................................25 HowtosetupBIOSwheninstallingWindows7.................................................26 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery system ................................... 27 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting ................................................................. 29 Frequentlyaskedquestions .....................................................................................29 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................32 Trademarks............................................................................................ 36 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Note: Thedashedareasindicatepartsthatareinvisiblefromoutside. Attention:

Donotopenthedisplaypanelbeyond300degrees.Whenclosingthedisplaypanel,be carefulnottoleavepensoranyotherobjectsinbetweenthedisplaypanelandthe keyboard.Otherwise,thedisplaypanelmaybedamaged. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a b c d e Integrated camera Built-in microphone Display Wireless antennas Touch pad Usedforvideocommunicationortakingphotos. Capturessoundwhichcanbeusedforvideo conferencing,voicenarration,oraudiorecording. Providesvisualoutput. Connectstothewirelessadaptertoreceiveandsend wirelessradiosignals. Thetouchpadfunctionsasaconventionalmouse. Touchpad:Tomovethepointeronthescreen,slideyour fingertiponthepadinthedirectionyouwishtomovethe cursor. Touchpadbuttons:Performthefunctionsoftheleftand rightbuttonsasthoseoftheleftandrightbuttonsona conventionalmouse. Note: YoucanenableordisabletheTouchpadandtheTouchpadbuttonsbypressing

. f Numeric keypad Fordetails,seeUsingthekeyboardonpage3. 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using the keyboard Yourcomputerhasanumerickeypad,hotkeys,andfunctionkeysincorpo ratedintoitsstandardkeyboard. Numeric keypad Thekeyboardhasaseparatenumerickeypad.Toenableordisablethe numerickeypad,presstheNumLockkey. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Hotkeys Youcanaccesscertainsystemsettingsquicklybypressingtheappropriate hotkeys.

: Mutes/unmutesthesound.

: Enables/disablesairplanemode.

: Decreasesthevolumelevel.

: Increasesthevolumelevel.

: Closesthecurrentlyactivewin dow.

: Refreshesthedesktoporthecur rentlyactivewindow. Enables/disablesthe touchpadandthetouchpad buttons.

:

: Switchestheactiveprogram.

: Turnson/offthebacklightofthe display.

: Projectstoaconnecteddisplay.

: Decreasesdisplaybrightness.

: Increasesdisplaybrightness. Note: IfyouchangedtheHotkeyModefromEnabledtoDisabledintheBIOSsetuputility, youwillneedtopresstheFnkeyincombinationwiththeappropriatehotkey. 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Function key combinations Throughtheuseofthefunctionkeys,youcanchangeoperationalfeatures instantly.Tousethisfunction,pressandholdFn

;thenpressoneofthe functionkeys a b

. 1 2 Thefollowingdescribesthefeaturesofeachfunctionkey. Fn + Home:

Fn + End:

Fn + PgUp:

Fn + PgDn:

Fn + Space:

Activatethepausefunction. Activatethebreakfunction. Enable/Disablethescrolllock. Activatethesystemrequest. Turnon/offthekeyboardbacklight. 2 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Positioning the display panel Notebook Mode Suitablefortasksthatrequireakeyboardandmouse(suchascreating documents,writingemails,andsoon). Stand Mode (Theater Mode) Suitablefortasksthatrequirelittleornotouch(suchasviewingphotosor playingvideos). Attention:

Donotopenthedisplaywithtoomuchforce,otherwisethedisplaypanelorhingesmay bedamaged. Note: Thekeyboardandtouchpadareautomaticallylockedifthekeyboardpanelfaces down. 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 2 3 4 5 6 a b AC power adapter jack Ventilation slots ConnectstheACpoweradapter. Dissipateinternalheat. Attention:

Makesurethatnoneoftheventilationslotsareblockedorelseoverheatingofthe computermayoccur. c d USB 2.0 port Combo audio jack ConnectstoUSBdevices.Fordetails,seeConnecting USBdevicesonpage8. Connectstoheadsets. Notes:

Thecomboaudiojackdoesnotsupportconventionalmicrophones.

Therecordingfunctionmaynotbesupportedifthirdpartyheadphonesorheadsetsare connected,duetodifferentindustrystandards. e Memory card slot f Novo button Insertmemorycards(notsupplied)here.Fordetails,see Usingmemorycards(notsupplied)onpage12. Whenthecomputerisoff,pressthisbuttontostartthe LenovoOneKeyRecoverysystemortheBIOSsetup utility,ortoenterthebootmenu. Note: Fordetails,seeChapter3.LenovoOneKeyRecoverysystemonpage27. 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting USB devices YoucanconnectaUSBdevicetoyourcomputerbyinsertingitsUSBplug

(TypeA)intotheUSBportonyourcomputer. ThefirsttimeyouplugaUSBdeviceintoaUSBportonyourcomputer, Windowsautomaticallyinstallsadriverforthatdevice.Afterthedriveris installed,youcandisconnectandreconnectthedevicewithoutperforming anyadditionalsteps. Note: Typically,Windowsdetectsanewlyconnecteddeviceafterconnectingit,andthen installsthedriverautomatically.However,somedevicesmayrequireyoutoinstallthe driverbeforeconnecting.Checkthedocumentationprovidedbythemanufacturerof thedevicebeforeconnecting. BeforedisconnectingaUSBstoragedevice,makesureyourcomputerhas finishedtransferringdatabythatdevice.ClicktheSafelyRemoveHardware andEjectMediaiconinthenotificationareaoftheWindowsdesktopscreen toremovethedevicebeforedisconnecting. Note: IfyourUSBdeviceusesapowercord,connectthedevicetoapowersourcebefore connectingit.Otherwise,thedevicemaynotberecognized. 8 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a Kensington slot b c d e RJ-45 port HDMI port USB 2.0 port USB 3.0 port bf Power button Indicator Power status indicator 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Attachasecuritylock(notsupplied)heretohelpprotect yourcomputerfromtheftandunauthorizeduse. Youcanattachasecuritylocktoyourcomputertohelp preventitfrombeingremovedwithoutyourpermission. Fordetailsoninstallingthesecuritylock,pleasereferto theinstructionsshippedwiththesecuritylockthatyou havepurchased. ConnectsthecomputertoanEthernetnetwork. ConnectstodeviceswithHDMIinputsuchasaTVora display. ConnecttoUSBdevices.Fordetails,seeConnectingUSB devicesonpage8. ConnecttoUSBdevices.Fordetails,seeConnectingUSB devicesonpage8. Pressthisbuttontoturnonthecomputer. Indicator status On(solid white) Blinking Off Charge Status Meaning Thecomputerispoweredon. Thecomputerisinsleepmode. Thecomputerispoweredoff. 9 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Meaning Charge Status Discharging Thebatteryhasmorethan20%

charge. Discharging Thebatteryhasbetween5%

Charging/

Discharging Charging Charging and20%charge. Thebatteryhaslessthan5%

charge. Thebatteryisbeingcharged. Whenbatterychargereaches 20%,theblinkingcolor changestowhite. Thebatteryhasbetween20%

and80%chargeandisstill charging.Whenthebattery reaches80%chargethelight willstopblinking,butcharg ingwillcontinueuntilthebat teryisfullycharged. bg Battery status indicator Indicator Battery status indicator Indicator status On(solid white) Solid amber Fast blinking amber Slow blinking amber Slow blinking white 10 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting network cables Toinsertanetworkcable,dothefollowing:

1 HoldtheconnectorofthenetworkcableandpushtheRJ45coverdown inthedirectionbyarrow

. a 2 InserttheconnectorintotheRJ45portinthedirectionbyarrow b

. 1 2 Software configuration ConsultyourInternetServiceProvider(ISP)fordetailsonhowtoconfigure yourcomputer. 11 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using memory cards (not supplied) Yourcomputersupportsthefollowingtypesofmemorycard:

SecureDigital(SD)card MultiMediaCard(MMC) Attention:

ThiscardreaderdoesnotsupportSDIOdevices(e.g.,SDIOBluetooth,etc.). Insertonlyonecardintheslotatatime. Inserting a memory card Slideamemorycardinuntilitclicksintoplace. Note: Ifadummycardisshippedwiththecomputer,pushthedummycardandthen removeitbeforeinsertingamemorycard. Removing a memory card Gentlypullthememorycardoutofthememorycardslot. Attention:

Beforeremovingamemorycard,disableitthroughSafelyRemoveHardwareand EjectMediatoavoiddatacorruption. 12 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

1 2 a b Ventilation slots Allowairtoenterthecomputerforcooling. Speakers Provideaudiooutput. 13 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 ThedefaultsystemofyourcomputerisWindows8.1.ToinstallWindows7 system,makesuretosetuptheBIOSfirst.AbouthowtosetupBIOS,see HowtosetupBIOSwheninstallingWindows7onpage26. Configuring the operating system for the first time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Youmayneedtoconfiguretheoperatingsystemwhenitisfirstused.The configurationprocessmayincludetheproceduresbelow:

Acceptingtheenduserlicenseagreement ConfiguringtheInternetconnection Registeringtheoperatingsystem Creatingauseraccount Operating system interfaces - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Windows8.1comeswithtwomainuserinterfaces:theStartscreenandthe Windowsdesktop. To switch from the Start screen to the Windows desktop, do one of the following:

SelecttheWindowsdesktoptileontheStartscreen. PresstheWindowskey ToswitchfromthedesktoptotheStartscreen,dooneofthefollowing:

SelectStart PresstheWindowskey Movethecursortothelowerleftcorner,andthenselecttheStartbutton. fromthecharmsbar.

+D. Start screen Desktop 14 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 The charms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

CharmsarenavigationbuttonsthatletyoucontrolyourWindows8.1 experience.Charmsinclude:Search,Share,Start,Devices,andSettings.The CharmsBaristhemenuthatcontainsthecharms. Thefivecharmsprovidenewandfasterwaystoperformmanybasictasks, andarealwaysavailableregardlessofwhicheverappyouarecurrentlyin. To display the charms, do one of the following:

Movethecursortotheupperrightorlowerrightcorneruntilthecharms barisdisplayed. PressWindowskey

+C. Search charm TheSearchcharmisapowerfulnewwaytofindwhatyouarelookingfor, includingsettings,files,Webimages,Webvideos,etc. 15 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Share charm TheSharecharmletsyousendlinks,photos,andmoretoyourfriendsand socialnetworkswithoutleavingtheappyouarein. Start charm TheStartcharmisafastwaytogototheStartscreen. Devices charm TheDevicescharmallowsyoutoconnectorsendfilestoanyexternal devices,includingthedevicestoplay,print,andproject. Settings charm TheSettingscharmletsyouperformbasictasks,suchassettingthevolume orshuttingdownthecomputer.Also,youcangettotheControlPanel throughtheSettingscharmwhenontheDesktopscreen. 16 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

When you have finished working with your computer, you can put it to sleep or shut it down. Putting your computer to sleep Ifyouwillbeawayfromyourcomputerforonlyashorttime,putthe computertosleep. When the computer is in sleep mode, you can quickly wake it to resume use, bypassing the startup process. Toputthecomputertosleep,dooneofthefollowing:

Closethedisplaylid. Pressthepowerbutton. Openthecharms,andthenselectSettings Power Sleep. Note: Waituntilthepowerindicatorlightstartsblinking(indicatingthatthecomputeris insleepmode)beforeyoumoveyourcomputer.Movingyourcomputerwhilethe harddiskisspinningcandamagetheharddisk,causinglossofdata. Towakethecomputer,dooneofthefollowing:

Pressanykeyonthekeyboard. Note: Ifthecomputerdoesnotawakenafterpressingakeyonthekeyboard,thismeans thatthecomputerhasenteredanenhancedpowersavingmode. Pressthepowerbutton. 17 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Shutting down the computer Ifyouarenotgoingtouseyourcomputerforalongtime,shutitdown. Toshutdownyourcomputer,dooneofthefollowing:

OpenthecharmsbarandselectSettings Power Shutdown. RightclicktheStartbuttoninthelowerleftcornerandselectShutdown orsignoutShutdown. 18 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 OntheStartscreen,click andselectShutdown. Note: ThisoperationdependsonyourBIOSsettings.Pleaserefertotheactualproduct. 19 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Touch screen operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Thedisplaypanelcanacceptinputslikeatablet,usingthemultitouch screen,orlikeatraditionalnotebookcomputer,usingthekeyboardand touchpad. Multi-touch gestures Youcantouchthescreenwithoneormorefingertipstoperformavarietyof tasks. Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Tap Taponceonanitem. Performsanaction,suchasstarting anapp,openingalink,or performingacommand.Similarto leftclickingwithamouse. Press and hold Pressyourfingerdownandleaveitthere foramoment. Allowsyoutoseedetailed informationbeforeselectingan action.Canalsoopenamenuwith moreoptions.Similarto rightclickingwithamouse. 20 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Zoom Movetwofingerstogetherorapartwhile touchingthescreen. Zoomsinandoutonvisualapps, suchaspicturesandmaps.Canalso jumptothebeginningorendofalist. Rotate Placetwoormorefingersonanitemand thenturnyourhand. Turnsanobject.(Note:Notallitems canberotated,dependinguponthe app.) Slide Dragyourfingeracrossthescreen. Pansorscrollsthroughlistsand pages.Canalsomoveanobjectorbe usedtodraworwrite,depending upontheapp.Similartopressing andholdingtopanandtoscrolling withamouse. 21

Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swipe Startfromanyedgeofthescreen,then swipeinwardstowardthecenter. Swipingdownfromthetopedgeor upfromthebottomedgedisplaysa taskbaronthebottomofthescreen withappcommands,includingNew, Refresh,andothercommands. Ifyouhaveanappcurrentlyopen, youcanalso:

Swipefromthetopedgeto halfwaydownthescreenwithout liftingyourfingertodockthatapp ontheleftorrightsideofthe screen.Thisallowsyoutokeep twoappsopensimultaneouslyina splitscreenformat. Swipefromthetopedgestraight downtothebottomedgeofthe screencontinuouslywithoutlifting yourfingertoclosethecurrently openapp. 22 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swipinginfromtheleftedgecan:

Bringinandopenanappcurrently runninginthebackground. Ifthereismorethanonecurrently openapp,youcan:

Swipeinfromthelefttobringin anappand,withoutliftingyour finger,pushthatappquicklyback offtheleftedgeofthescreen.This displaysalistoftheappscurrently runninginthebackground. Swipinginfromtherightedgeofthe screendisplaysthecharms. 23 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Connecting to a wireless network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Enabling wireless connection Toenablewirelessfunctions,dooneofthefollowing:

Press todisableairplanemode. OpenthecharmsandselectSettings toopenthenetwork configurationpage.Thentoggletheairplanemodeswitchtooff. Connecting to a wireless network Afterwirelesshasbeenenabled,thecomputerwillautomaticallyscanfor availablewirelessnetworksanddisplaytheminthewirelessnetworklist.To connecttoawirelessnetwork,clickthenetworknameinthelist,andthen clickConnect. Note: Somenetworksrequireanetworksecuritykeyorpassphraseforconnection.To connecttooneofthosenetworks,askthenetworkadministratorortheInternetservice provider(ISP)forthesecuritykeyorpassphrase. 24 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Help and support - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ifyouhaveaproblemwiththeoperatingsystem,seetheWindowsHelpand Supportfile.ToopentheWindowsHelpandSupportfile,dooneofthe following:

SelectSettingscharm,thenselectHelp. PressF1orFn+F1(dependingonyourkeyboardlayout). YoucanreadtheWindowsHelpandSupportfileonyourcomputer.Youcan alsogetonlinehelpandsupportbyclickingononeofthetwolinkslisted underMoretoexplore. Note: Windows8.1alsoprovidesanapp,Help+Tips.YoucanfinditontheStartscreen,to learnmoreinformationonnewfeaturesofWindows8.1. 25 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 How to set up BIOS when installing Windows 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

WheninstallingWindows7,setuptheBIOSbythefollowingsteps:

1 PresstheNovobuttontoentertheNovoButtonMenuwhenthe computerisoff. 2 EntertheBIOSSetupmenu. 3 IntheExitpanel,settheOSOptimizedDefaultsitemasOtherOS.Then PressFn+F9toloadthedefaultconfiguration. 4 IntheBootpanel,settheBootModeitemasLegacySupportandtheBoot PriorityitemasLegacyFirst. 5 IntheBootpanel,settheODDasthefirstbootorderfortheBootPriority Orderitembyfollowingtheitemspecifichelp. 6 IntheConfigurationpanel,setthexCHIModeasDisabled. 26 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery system TheLenovoOneKeyRecoverysystemissoftwaredesignedtobackupand restoreyourcomputer.Youcanuseittorestorethesystempartitiontoits originalstatusincaseofasystemfailure.Youcanalsocreateuserbackups foreasyrestorationasrequired. Notes:

IfyourcomputerispreinstalledwithanoperatingsystemotherthanWindows,OneKey Recoverysystemisnotavailable.

ToutilizethefeaturesoftheOneKeyRecoverysystem,yourharddiskalreadyincludesa hiddenpartitionbydefaulttostorethesystemimagefileandtheOneKeyRecovery systemprogramfiles.Thisdefaultpartitionishiddenforsecurityreasons,whichexplains whytheavailablediskspaceislessthanthestatedcapacity. Backing up the system partition Youcanbackupthesystempartitiontoanimagefile.Tobackupthesystem partition:

1 PresstheNovobuttontostarttheLenovoOneKeyRecoverysystem. 2 EnterSystemRecovery. 3 SelectabackuplocationandclickNexttostartthebackup. Notes:

Youcanchooseabackuplocationonthelocalharddiskdriveoranexternalstoragedevice.

RemovetheremovableharddiskdrivebeforestartingtheLenovoOneKeyRecovery system.Otherwise,datafromtheremovableharddiskdrivemightbelost.

Thebackupprocessmaytakeawhile.

ThebackupprocessisonlyavailablewhenWindowscanbestartednormally. Restoring Youcanchoosetorestorethesystempartitiontoitsoriginalstatusortoa previouslycreatedbackuppoint.Torestorethesystempartition:

1 PresstheNovobuttontostarttheLenovoOneKeyRecoverysystem. 2 EnterSystemRecovery.Thecomputerwillrestarttotherecoveryenvironment. 3 Followtheonscreeninstructionstorestorethesystempartitiontoits originalstatusortoapreviouslycreatedbackuppoint. Notes:

Therecoveryprocessisirreversible.Makesuretobackupanydatayouwishtosaveon thesystempartitionbeforestartingtherecoveryprocess.

Therecoveryprocessmaytakeawhile.SobesuretoconnecttheACpoweradapterto yourcomputerduringtherecoveryprocess.

TheaboveinstructionsshouldbefollowedwhenWindowscanbestartednormally. 27 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery system IfWindowscannotbestarted,followthestepsbelowtostarttheLenovo OneKeyRecoverysystem:

1 Shutdownthecomputer. 2 PresstheNovobutton.FromtheNovobuttonmenu,selectSystem RecoveryandpressEnter. 28 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Thissectionlistsfrequentlyaskedquestionsbycategory. Finding information What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

TheLenovoSafetyandGeneralInformationGuidewhichcamewithyour computercontainssafetyprecautionsforusingyourcomputer.Readand followalltheprecautionswhenusingyourcomputer. Where can I find the hardware specifications for my computer?

Youcanfindhardwarespecificationforyourcomputerfromtheprinted flyerswhichcamewithyourcomputer. Where can I find warranty information?

Forthewarrantyapplicabletoyourcomputer,includingthewarranty periodandtypeofwarrantyservice,seetheLenovolimitedwarrantyflyer thatcamewithyourcomputer. Drivers and preinstalled software Where are the installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software (desktop software)?

YourcomputerdidnotcomewithinstallationdiscsforLenovopreinstalled software.Ifyouneedtoreinstallpreinstalledsoftware,youcanfindthe installationprogramontheCorDpartitionofyourharddisk.Ifyou cannotfindtheinstallationprogramthere,downloaditfromtheLenovo consumersupportWebsite. Where can I find drivers for the various hardware devices of my computer?

IfyourcomputerispreinstalledwithaWindowsoperatingsystem,Lenovo providesdriversforthehardwaredevicesthatyouneedontheCorD partitionofyourharddisk.Youcanalsodownloadthelatestdevicedrivers fromtheLenovoconsumersupportWebsite. 29 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Lenovo OneKey Recovery system Wherearetherecoverydiscs?

Yourcomputerdidnotcomewithrecoverydiscs.UsetheLenovoOneKey Recoverysystemifyouneedtorestorethesystemtoitsfactorystatus. What can I do if the back-up process fails?

Ifyoucanstartthebackupbutitfailsduringthebackupprocess,trythe followingsteps:

1 Closeallopenprograms,andthenrestartthebackupprocess. 2 Checktoseeifthedestinationmediaisdamaged.Selectanotherpath andthentryagain. When do I need to restore the system to its factory status?

Usethisfeaturewhentheoperatingsystemfailstostartup.Ifthereis criticaldataonthesystempartition,backitupbeforestartingrecovery. BIOS setup utility What is the BIOS setup utility?

TheBIOSsetuputilityisROMbasedsoftware.Itcommunicatesbasic computerinformationandprovidesoptionsforsettingbootdevices, security,hardwaremode,andotherpreferences. How can I start the BIOS setup utility?

TostarttheBIOSsetuputility,dooneofthefollowing:

Shutdownthecomputer.PresstheNovobuttonandthenselectBIOS Setup.

PressFn+F2atstartup. How can I change the boot mode?

Therearetwobootmodes:UEFIandLegacySupport.Tochangetheboot mode,starttheBIOSsetuputilityandsetbootmodetoUEFIorLegacy Supportonthebootmenu. 30 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting When do I need to change the boot mode?

ThedefaultbootmodeforyourcomputerisUEFImode.Ifyouneedto installalegacyWindowsoperatingsystem(thatis,anyoperatingsystem beforeWindows8)onyourcomputer,youmustchangethebootmodeto LegacySupport.ThelegacyWindowsoperatingsystemcannotbe installedifyoudontchangethebootmode. Getting help How can I contact the customer support center?

SeeChapter3.GettinghelpandserviceofLenovoSafetyandGeneral InformationGuide. 31 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. My screen goes blank while the computer is on.

Ifthescreenisblank,makesurethat:

TheACpoweradapterisconnectedtothe computer,andthepowercordispluggedintoa workingelectricaloutlet. Thecomputerpowerison.(Pressthepowerbutton againforconfirmation.) IfyouareusingtheACpoweradapterorthe battery,andthebatterystatusindicatorison,press F12(

Iftheseitemsareproperlyset,andthescreenremains blank,havethecomputerserviced.

)tomakethescreenbrighter.

RestorebackedupfilestoyourWindows environmentortheentirecontentsofyourharddisk toitsoriginalfactorycontentsusingtheLenovo OneKeyRecoverysystem.Ifyoustillseeonlythe cursoronthescreen,havethecomputerserviced.

Yourscreensaverorpowermanagementmaybe enabled.Dooneofthefollowingtoexitfromthe screensaverortoresumefromsleepmode:

Touchthetouchpad. Pressanykeyonthekeyboard. Pressthepowerbutton. PressF9(

fortheLCDscreenhasbeenturnedoff. Iftheproblempersists,followthesolutioninthe nextproblemThescreenisunreadableor distorted.

)toconfirmwhetherthebacklight The screen is unreadable or distorted.

Makesurethat:

Thedisplaydevicedriverisinstalledcorrectly. Thescreenresolutionandcolorqualityarecorrectly set. Themonitortypeiscorrect. 32 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Incorrect characters appear on the screen.

Aretheoperatingsystemorprogramsinstalled correctly?Iftheyareinstalledandconfigured correctly,havethecomputerserviced. BIOS password problems I forgot my password. Sleep problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on self-test

(POST).

Ifyouforgetyouruserpassword,youmustaskthe systemadministratortoresetyouruserpassword. IfyouforgetyourHDDpassword,aLenovo authorizedservicercannotresetyourpasswordor recoverdatafromtheharddisk.Youmusttakeyour computertoaLenovoauthorizedservicerora marketingrepresentativetohavetheharddiskdrive replaced.Proofofpurchaseisrequired,andafeewill bechargedforpartsandservice. Ifyouforgetyouradministratorpassword,aLenovo authorizedservicercannotresetyourpassword.You musttakeyourcomputertoaLenovoauthorized serviceroramarketingrepresentativetohavethe systemboardreplaced.Proofofpurchaseisrequired, andafeewillbechargedforpartsandservice.

Thebatterypowerisgettinglow.ConnecttheAC poweradaptertothecomputer,orreplacethebattery withafullychargedone.

Makesurethat:

Thebatteryischarged. Theoperatingtemperatureiswithintheacceptable range.SeeChapter2.UseandcareInformationof LenovoSafetyandGeneralInformationGuide.

Note:Ifthebatteryischargedandthetemperatureiswithinrange,havethecomputerserviced. The computer does not return from sleep mode, and the computer does not work. Ifyourcomputerisinsleepmode,connecttheAC adaptertothecomputerandthenpressanykeyor thepowerbutton. Ifthesystemstilldoesnotreturnfromsleepmode, stopsresponding,orcannotbeturnedoff,resetthe computer.Unsaveddatamaybelost.Toresetthe computer,pressandholdthepowerbuttonfor4 secondsormore.

33 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the volume is turned up. Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indi-

cator shows empty.

Makesurethat:

Themutefunctionisoff. Thecomboaudiojackisnotused. Thespeakerisselectedastheplaybackdevice.

ResetthebatterygaugeusingLenovoEnergy Management.Iftheproblempersists,replacewitha newbatterypack. The computer does not operate with a fully charged battery.

Thesurgeprotectorinthebatterymightbeactive. Turnoffthecomputerforoneminutetoresetthe protector;thenturnonthecomputeragain. A hard disk drive problem The hard disk drive does not work.

IntheBootmenuintheBIOSsetuputility,makesure thattheharddiskdriveisincludedintheEFIlist. 34 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Other problems Your computer does not respond.

Toturnoffyourcomputer,pressandholdthepower buttonfor4secondsormore.Ifthecomputerstill doesnotrespond,removethebatterypackandthe ACpoweradapter.

Yourcomputermightlockwhenitenterssleepmode duringacommunicationoperation.Disablethesleep timerwhenyouareworkingonthenetwork. I need to start the computer from a connected device, but the device does not appear on the boot device list.

CheckthebootmodesettingintheBIOSsetuputility. IfBootModeissettoUEFI,makesurethatthe deviceorthemediuminthedevicesupportsUEFI boot.Ifthedeviceorthemediuminthedevicedoes notsupportUEFIboot,setBootModetoLegacy Support.Ifthedevicestilldoesnotappearinthe bootdevicelist,replacewithanewdeviceor medium. The connected external device does not work.

Donotconnectordisconnectanyexternaldevice cablesotherthanUSBwhilethecomputerpoweris on;otherwise,youmightdamageyourcomputer.

Whenusingahighpowerconsumptionexternal devicesuchasanexternalUSBopticaldiskdrive,use anexternaldevicepoweradapter.Otherwise,the devicemaynotberecognized,orsystemshutdown mayresult. 35 Trademarks ThefollowingtermsaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofLenovoin theUnitedStates,othercountries,orboth. Lenovo OneKey MicrosoftandWindowsaretrademarksofMicrosoftCorporationinthe UnitedStates,othercountries,orboth. Othercompany,products,orservicenamesmaybetrademarksorservice marksofothers. 36 Lenovo Flex 2-14/Flex 2-14D Flex 2-15/Flex 2-15D User Guide L e n o v o C h n a 2 0 1 4 i en-US Rev. AA00 Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Lenovo Edge 15 Regulatory Notice Lenovo regulatory notice for wireless adapters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ThismanualcontainsregulatoryinformationforthefollowingLenovoproducts:

LenovoEdge15 ThefollowingwirelessmodulesaresupportedonLenovoEdge15:

3160NGW QCNFA335 RTL8723BE BCM943142Y BCM943162ZP Read first regulatory information PleasereadthisdocumentbeforeyouusetheLenovocomputer.Lenovocomputercomplies withtheradiofrequencyandsafetystandardsofanycountryorregioninwhichithasbeen approvedforwirelessuse.Youmustinstallanduseyourcomputerinstrictaccordancewith theinstructionsasdescribedhereafter. VeuillezlirecedocumentavantdutiliserlordinateurLenovo.LordinateurLenovoestcon formeauxnormesdescuritetderadiofrquencedupaysoudelargionosonutilisa tionsansfilestagre.Vousdevezinstalleretutiliservotreordinateurenrespectant scrupuleusementlesinstructionsdcritesciaprs. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) I. Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN module FCCID:PD93160NGU(Model:3160NGW) FCCID:PPDQCNFA335(Model:QCNFA335) FCCID:TX2RTL8723BE(Model:RTL8723BE) FCCID:QDSBRCM1079(Model:BCM943142Y) FCCID:QDSBRCM1075(Model:BCM943162ZP) 1 i)FCCID ofwirelessmodule:

OnthebottomsideofyourLenovocomputer,youwillfindanindicatorlabeloftheformat ContainsTransmitterModule:FCCIDXXXX,whereXXXXrepresentstheFCCIDthatcorre spondstoyourpreinstalledWirelessLANmodule. ii)RadioFrequencyinterferencerequirement:

EachdevicehasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassBdigitaldevicepur suanttoFCCPart15SubpartB.RefertoElectronicemissionnoticesonpage5. WhenyouuseawirelessLANmoduleinthe802.11a/ntransmissionmode:

High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5650 to 5850 MHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. II. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Makesureofthefollowingconditionsonuseofwirelessfeatures:

1. WhenyouuseanyotherRFoptiondevice,allwirelessfeaturesinyourLenovocomputer 2. UsersmustfollowtheRFSafetyinstructionsonwirelessoptiondevicesthatareincluded arerequiredtobeturnedoff. intheRFoptiondevicesusersmanual. 2 Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC Certification number I)FactorypreinstalledWirelessLANmodules:

IC:1000M3160NG(Model:3160NGW) IC:4104AQCNFA335(Model:QCNFA335) IC:6317ARTL8723BE(Model:RTL8723BE) IC:4324ABRCM1079(Model:BCM943142Y) IC:4324ABRCM1075(Model:BCM943162ZP) ThereisnocertificationnumberofIndustryCanadaforMiniPCIExpressCardshownonthe enclosureofyourLenovocomputer.Insteadyouwillfindanindicatorlabelpointingtothe locationoftheICCertificationnumberonthebottomsideofyourLenovocomputer.Thislabel willbeoftheformatContainsTransmitterModule:CanadaIC:XXXX,whereXXXXrepre sentstheICIDthatcorrespondstoyourpreinstalledWLANmodule. II)Lowpowerlicenseexemptradiocommunicationdevices(RSS210):

Operationissubjecttothefollowingtwoconditions:

1. Thisdevicemaynotcauseinterference,and 2. thisdevicemustacceptanyinterference,includinginterferencethatmaycauseundesired operationofthedevice. Thetransmitterdeviceshavebeendesignedtooperatewiththeantennasintegratedin Lenovocomputer,andhavingamaximumgainofwithin3dBi. III)ExposureofhumanstoRFfields(RSS102):

LenovocomputersemploylowgainintegralantennasthatdonotemitRFfieldinexcessof HealthCanadalimitsforthegeneralpopulation;consultSafetyCode6,obtainablefrom HealthCanadasWebsiteatwww.hcsc.gc.ca/rpb Theradiatedenergyfromtheantennasconnectedtothewirelessadaptersconformstothe IClimitoftheRFexposurerequirementregardingICRSS102,Issue4clause4.2. Themaximumantennagainpermittedfordevicesinthe52505350MHz,54705725MHz, and57255825MHzbandscomplieswiththee.i.r.p.limitinsectionA9.2ofRSS210. WhenyouuseaWirelessLANandBluetoothCombomoduleadapterinthe802.11a/n transmissionmode:harmfulinterferencetocochannelMobileSatellitesystems. 5350MHzand56505850MHzbandsandtheseradarscouldcauseinterferenceand/or damagetoLELAN(LicenceExemptLocalAreaNetwork)devices. 3 Numro dhomologation IC I)Modulesderseauxlocalsansfilprinstalllusine:

IC:1000M3160NG(Model:3160NGW) IC:4104AQCNFA335(Model:QCNFA335) IC:6317ARTL8723BE(Model:RTL8723BE) IC:4324ABRCM1079(Model:BCM943142Y) IC:4324ABRCM1075(Model:BCM943162ZP) LescartesderseaulocalsansfilExpressminiPCIcommercialisesauxEtatsUnisetau Canadaneprennentpasenchargelescanauxtendus(12ch,13ch)etnefonctionnentdonc passurdetelscanaux. LebotierdevotreordinateurLenovonecomportepasdenumrodhomologationIC(Industry Canada)pourlacarteminiPCIExpress;maissousvotreLenovo,voustrouverezunetiquette indicatricepointantverslemplacementdunumrodhomologationIC.Ltiquetteseprsente souslaformeContainsTransmitterModule:CanadaIC:XXXXoXXXXreprsentelIDICqui correspondaumoduleWLANprinstall. II)Remarquerelativeauxappareilsdecommunicationradiodefaiblepuissancesans licence(CNR210):

Lefonctionnementdecetypedappareilestsoumisauxdeuxconditionssuivantes:

1. Cetappareilnedoitpasperturberlescommunicationsradio,et 2. cetappareildoitsupportertouteperturbation,ycomprislesperturbationsquipourraient provoquersondysfonctionnement. Lespriphriquesdmissionsontconuspourfonctionneravecdesantennesintgresaux Lenovoetayantungainmaximaldemoinsde3dBi. III)Expositiondestreshumainsauxchampsradiolectriques(RF)(CNR102):

LordinateurLenovoutilisedesantennesintgralesfaiblegainquinmettentpasun champlectromagntiquesuprieurauxnormesimposesparleMinistredelasantcana dienpourlapopulation.ConsultezleSafetyCode6surlesiteWebduMinistredelasant canadienladressewww.hcsc.gc.ca/rpb. Lnergiemiseparlesantennesreliesauxadaptateurssansfilrespectelalimitedexposition auxradiofrquencestellequedfinieparIndustrieCanadadanslaclause4.2dudocument CNR102. Legaindantennemaximalautorispourlesappareilsdanslesbandesdefrquence52505350 MHz,54705725MHzet57255825MHzestconformelalimitep.i.r.e(puissanceisotrope rayonnequivalente)dfiniedanslasectionA9.2duCNR210. LorsquevousutilisezunadaptateurdemodulecombinBluetoothetLANsansfildansle modedetransmission802.11a/n:intrieurafinderduirelesrisquesdeperturbationslectro magntiquesgnantessurlessystmesdesatellitemobiledansunmmecanal. quilssontprioritaires)desbandes52505350MHzet. 56505850MHz.llspeuventprovoquerdesperturbationslectromagntiquessurlesappar eilsdetypeLELAN(rseaudecommunicationlocalsanslicence)oulesendommager. 4 Electronic emission notices FederalCommunicationsCommission(FCC)DeclarationofConformity Model:QCNFA335 Model:RTL8723BE Model:3160NGW Model:BCM943142Y Model:BCM943162ZP ThisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassBdigital device,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovidereason ableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferenceinaresidentialinstallation.Thisequipment generates,uses,andcanradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedin accordancewiththeinstructions,maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications. However,thereisnoguaranteethatinterferencewillnotoccurinaparticularinstallation.If thisequipmentdoescauseharmfulinterferencetoradioortelevisionreception,whichcan bedeterminedbyturningtheequipmentoffandon,theuserisencouragedtotrytocorrect theinterferencebyoneormoreofthefollowingmeasures:

Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna. Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentandreceiver. Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdifferentfromthattowhichthereceiver Consultanauthorizeddealerorservicerepresentativeforhelp. Lenovoisnotresponsibleforanyradioortelevisioninterferencecausedbyunauthorized changesormodificationstothisequipment.Unauthorizedchangesormodificationscould voidtheusersauthoritytooperatetheequipment. ThisdevicecomplieswithPart15oftheFCCRules.Operationissubjecttothefollowingtwo conditions:(1)thisdevicemaynotcauseharmfulinterference,and(2)thisdevicemustaccept anyinterferencereceived,includinginterferencethatmaycauseundesiredoperation. ResponsibleParty:

isconnected. Lenovo(UnitedStates)Incorporated 1009ThinkPlaceBuildingOne Morrisville,NC27560 Telephone:19192945900 IndustryCanadaClassBEmissionComplianceStatement ThisClassBdigitalapparatuscomplieswithCanadianICES003. AvisdeconformitlarglementationdIndustrieCanada CetappareilnumriquedelaclasseBestconformelanormeNMB003duCanada. 5 L e n o v o C h n a 2 0 1 4 i Rev. AA01



Lenovo Flex 3 11 User Guide

  

Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 8.1. If you are using another Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice For details, refer to Guides & Manuals at http://support.lenovo.com. First Edition (February 2015) Copyright Lenovo 2015. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer ......................................... 1 Top view ..................................................................................................................... 1 Left-side view ............................................................................................................ 8 Right-side view ........................................................................................................ 13 Bottom view ............................................................................................................. 16 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 ............................................ 17 Configuring the operating system for the first time .................................................................................................................... 17 Operating system interfaces .................................................................................. 17 The charms ............................................................................................................... 18 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down ...................................................................................................................... 21 Touch screen operation .......................................................................................... 24 Connecting to a wireless network ........................................................................ 28 Help and support .................................................................................................... 29 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery system .................................. 30 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting ................................................................ 32 Frequently asked questions ................................................................................... 32 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................... 35 Trademarks ........................................................................................... 38 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ab e c d Note: The dashed areas indicate parts that are not visible externally. Attention:

When closing the display panel, be careful not to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a Integrated camera (on select models) b Built-in microphones c Multi-touch screen d Touch pad e Wireless LAN antennas Use the camera for video communication. Capture sound which can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or audio recording. The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant visual output. Multi-touch function is available on this display. The touch pad functions as a conventional mouse. Touch pad: To move the pointer on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the pointer to move. Touch pad buttons: The functions of the left/right side correspond to those of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Connect to a wireless LAN adapter to send and receive wireless radio signals. Note: You can enable/disable the touch pad by pressing F6 (

). 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using the keyboard Hotkeys You can access certain system settings quickly by pressing the appropriate hotkeys.

:

:

:

:

:

:

Mutes/unmutes the sound. Decreases the volume level. Increases the volume level. Closes the currently active window. Refreshes the desktop or the currently active window. Enables/disables the touch pad.

:

:

:

:

:

:

Enables/disables Airplane mode. Displays all currently active apps. Turns on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Toggles the display between the computer and an external device. Decreases display brightness. Increases display brightness. Note: If you changed the Hotkey Mode from Enabled to Disabled in the BIOS setup utility, you will need to press the Fn key in combination with the appropriate hotkey. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Function key combinations Through the use of the function keys, you can change operational features instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn a; then press one of the function keys b. a The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + PgUp:

Activates the Home function. Activates the End function. Fn + PgDn:

b 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Positioning the display panel The display panel can be opened to any angle up to 360 degrees. Notebook Mode Suitable for tasks that require a keyboard and mouse (such as creating documents, writing e-mails, and so on). 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Stand Mode (Theater Mode) Suitable for tasks that require little or no touch (such as viewing photos or playing videos). Tablet Mode Suitable for tasks that require touching the screen often (such as surfing the Web, playing games, and so on). 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Tent Mode (Presentation Mode) Suitable for tasks that require limited interaction with the touch screen (such as displaying graphs or PowerPoint presentations). Attention:

Do not open the display with too much force, otherwise the panel or hinges may be damaged. Note: The keyboard and touch pad are automatically locked when the screen is opened beyond 190 degrees (approximately). 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f g h a Kensington slot b AC power adapter jack Attach a security lock (not supplied) here to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use. You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Connects to the AC power adapter. c USB port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 11. d Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 12. e Combo audio Connects to headsets. jack Notes:

The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. The recording function may not be supported if third-party headphones or headsets are connected, due to different industry standards. 8 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer f Rotation lock button Keeps the screen locked in portrait or landscape orientation. Locking the screen rotation will disable the gravity sensing function, thereby preventing the screen from changing its orientation automatically depending upon the angle at which it is held. Note: The screen rotation lock button will be disabled in notebook mode. g Volume down Decreases the volume level. button h Volume up button Increases the volume level. 9 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Screen orientation You can rotate the display panel to your preferred orientation. The orientation of the display automatically changes (alternating between portrait and landscape modes) depending upon how you hold the computer. Portrait Landscape To prevent automatic orientation, press the rotation lock button. It is located on the right edge of the computer (See illustration below). Note: The screen rotation lock button will be disabled in notebook mode. 10 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting USB devices You can connect a USB device to your computer by inserting its USB plug

(Type A) into the USB port on your computer. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver has been installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after it has been connected, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data to that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the Windows notification area to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 11 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) card SD eXtended Capacity (SDXC) card MultiMediaCard (MMC) Notes:

This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Insert only one card in the slot at a time. Inserting a memory card Insert the memory card until it touches the bottom of the slot. Removing a memory card Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it by using the Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 12 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f a Battery status indicator b Power button Press this button to turn on the computer. and power status indicator Indicator Indicator status On (solid white) Solid amber Battery status indicator Fast blinking amber Slow blinking amber Slow blinking white Power status indicator On (solid white) Blinking Off Meaning The battery has more than 20% charge. The battery has between 5% and 20%

charge. The battery has less than 5% charge. The battery is being charged. When battery charge reaches 20%, the blinking color changes to white. The battery has between 20% and 80%

charge and is still charging. When the battery reaches 80% charge the light will stop blinking, but charging will continue until the battery is fully charged. The computer is powered on. The computer is in sleep mode. The computer is powered off. 13 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer c Novo button d USB port When the computer is off, press this button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system or the BIOS setup utility, or to enter the boot menu. Connects to USB devices. Notes:

If the battery charge is more than 20%, the USB port with a an external USB device, even when the computer is turned off. The blue port supports USB 3.0. For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 11. mark supports charging of e HDMI port f RJ-45 port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. Connects the computer to an Ethernet network. 14 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Connecting network cables To insert a network cable, do the following:

1 Hold one connector of the network cable to press the RJ-45 cover down gently a. 2 Insert the connector into the RJ-45 port b. a b Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 15 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a Speakers Provide audio output. a 16 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Configuring the operating system for the first time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below:

Accepting the end user license agreement Configuring the Internet connection Registering the operating system Creating a user account Operating system interfaces - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Windows 8.1 comes with two main user interfaces: the Start screen and the Windows desktop. To switch from the Start screen to the Windows desktop, do one of the following:

Select the Windows desktop tile on the Start screen. Press the Windows button. Press the Windows key

+ D. To switch from the desktop to the Start screen, do one of the following:

Select Start from the charms bar. Press the Windows key Move the cursor to the lower-left corner, and then select the Start button. Start screen Desktop 17 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 The charms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Charms are navigation buttons that let you control your Windows 8.1 experience. Charms include: Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings. The charms bar is the menu that contains the charms. The five charms provide new and faster ways to perform many basic tasks, and are always available regardless of whichever app you are currently in. To display the charms, do one of the following:

Move the cursor to the upper-right or lower-right corner until the charms bar is displayed. Use one finger to swipe in from the right edge of the screen until the charms bar is displayed. Press the Windows key

+ C. 18 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Search charm The Search charm is a powerful new way to find what you are looking for, including settings, files, Web images, Web videos, etc. Share charm The Share charm lets you send links, photos, and more to your friends and social networks without leaving the app you are in. Start charm The Start charm is a fast way to go to the Start screen. Devices charm The Devices charm allows you to connect or send files to any external devices, including the devices to play, print, and project. 19 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Settings charm The Settings charm lets you perform basic tasks, such as setting the volume or shutting down the computer. Also, you can get to the Control Panel through the Settings charm when on the Desktop screen. 20 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

When you have finished working with your computer, you can put it to sleep or shut it down. Putting your computer to sleep If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer to sleep. When the computer is in sleep mode, you can quickly wake it to resume use, bypassing the startup process. To put the computer to sleep, do one of the following:

Close the display lid. Press the power button. Open the charms bar and then select Settings o Power o Sleep. Note: Put your computer to sleep before you move it. Moving your computer while the hard disk drive is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following:

Press any key on the keyboard. (Notebook mode only) Press the power button. Press the Windows button. 21 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Shutting down the computer If you are not going to use your computer for a long time, shut it down. To shut down your computer, do one of the following:

Open the charms bar and then select Settings o Power o Shut down. 22 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner and select Shut down or sign out o Shut down. On the Start screen, click and select Shut down. Note: This operation depends on your BIOS settings. Please refer to the actual product. 23 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Touch screen operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The display panel can accept inputs like a tablet, using the multi-touch screen, or like a traditional notebook computer, using the keyboard and touch pad. Multi-touch gestures You can touch the screen with one or more fingertips to perform a variety of tasks. Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Tap Tap once on an item. Performs an action, such as starting an app, opening a link, or performing a command. Similar to left-clicking with a mouse. Press and hold Press your finger down and leave it there for a moment. Allows you to see detailed information before selecting an action. Can also open a menu with more options. Similar to right-clicking with a mouse. 24 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Zoom Move two fingers together or apart while touching the screen. Zooms in and out on visual apps, such as pictures and maps. Can also jump to the beginning or end of a list. Rotate Place two or more fingers on an item and then turn your hand. Turns an object. (Note: Not all items can be rotated, depending upon the app.) Slide Drag your finger across the screen. Pans or scrolls through lists and pages. Can also move an object or be used to draw or write, depending upon the app. Similar to pressing and holding to pan and to scrolling with a mouse. 25 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swipe Start from any edge of the screen, then swipe inwards toward the center. Swiping down from the top edge or up from the bottom edge displays a task bar on the bottom of the screen with app commands, including New, Refresh, and other commands. If you have an app currently open, you can also:

Swipe from the top edge to halfway down the screen without lifting your finger to dock that app on the left or right side of the screen. This allows you to keep two apps open simultaneously in a split-screen format. Swipe from the top edge straight down to the bottom edge of the screen continuously without lifting your finger to close the currently open app. 26 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swiping in from the left edge can:

Bring in and open an app currently running in the background. If there is more than one currently open app, you can:

Swipe in from the left to bring in an app and, without lifting your finger, push that app quickly back off the left edge of the screen. This displays a list of the apps currently running in the background. Swiping in from the right edge of the screen displays the charms. 27 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Connecting to a wireless network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless functions, do one of the following:

Press Open the charms bar and select Settings to disable airplane mode. o to open the network configuration page. Then toggle the airplane mode switch to Off. Connecting to a wireless network After wireless has been enabled, the computer will automatically scan for available wireless networks and display them in the wireless network list. To connect to a wireless network, click the network name in the list, and then click Connect. Note: Some networks require a network security key or passphrase for connection. To connect to one of those networks, ask the network administrator or the Internet service provider (ISP) for the security key or passphrase. 28 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8.1 Help and support - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you have a problem with the operating system, see the Windows Help and Support file. To open the Windows Help and Support file, do one of the following:

Select Settings charm, then select Help. Press Fn + F1 (depending on your keyboard layout) You can read the Windows Help and Support file on your computer. You can also get online help and support by clicking on one of the two links listed under More to explore. Note: Windows 8.1 also provides an app, Help+Tips. You can find it on the Start screen, to learn more information on new features of Windows 8.1. 29 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery system The Lenovo OneKey Recovery system is software designed to back up and restore your computer. You can use it to restore the system partition to its original status in case of a system failure. You can also create user backups for easy restoration as required. Notes:

If your computer is preinstalled with a GNU/Linux operating system, OneKey Recovery system is not available. To utilize the features of the OneKey Recovery system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and the OneKey Recovery system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons, which explains why the available disk space is less than the stated capacity. Backing up the system partition You can back up the system partition to an image file. This image file can be used to restore the system partition. To back up the system partition:

1 In Windows, press the Novo button or double-click OneKey Recovery icon to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. 2 Click System Backup. 3 Select a back-up location and click Next to start the backup. Notes:

You can choose a back-up location on the local hard disk drive or an external storage device. Remove the removable hard disk drive before starting the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. Otherwise, data from the removable hard disk drive might be lost. The back-up process may take a while. The back-up process is only available when Windows can be started normally. 30 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery system Restoring You can choose to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. To restore the system partition:

1 In Windows, press the Novo button or double-click OneKey Recovery icon to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. 2 Click System Recovery. The computer will restart to the recovery environment. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. Notes:

The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any data you wish to save on the system partition before starting the recovery process. The recovery process may take a while. So be sure to connect the AC power adapter to your computer during the recovery process. The above instructions should be followed when Windows can be started normally. If Windows cannot be started, then follow the steps below to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button. From the Novo Button Menu, select System recovery and press Enter. 31 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions by category. Finding information What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

The Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide which came with your computer contains safety precautions for using your computer. Read and follow all the precautions when using your computer. Where can I find the hardware specifications for my computer?

You can find hardware specification for your computer on the printed flyers which came with your computer. Where can I find warranty information?

For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer. Drivers and preinstalled software Where are the installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software (desktop software)?

Your computer did not come with installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software. If you need to reinstall any preinstalled software, you can find the installation program on the C partition of your hard disk. If you cannot find the installation program there, you can also download it from the Lenovo consumer support website. Where can I find drivers for the various hardware devices of my computer?

If your computer is preinstalled with a Windows operating system, Lenovo provides drivers for all the hardware devices that you need on the C partition of your hard disk. You can also download the latest device drivers from the Lenovo consumer support website. 32 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Lenovo OneKey Recovery system Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with recovery discs. Use the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system if you need to restore the system to its factory status. What can I do if the back-up process fails?

If you can start the backup but it fails during the back-up process, try the following steps:

1 Close all open programs, and then restart the back-up process. 2 Check to see if the destination media is damaged. Select another path and then try again. When do I need to restore the system to its factory status?

Use this feature when the operating system fails to start up. If there is critical data on the system partition, back it up before starting recovery. BIOS setup utility What is the BIOS setup utility?

The BIOS setup utility is ROM-based software. It displays basic computer information and provides options for setting boot devices, security, hardware mode, and other preferences. How can I start the BIOS setup utility?

To start the BIOS setup utility:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button and then select BIOS Setup. How can I change the boot mode?

There are two boot modes: UEFI and Legacy Support. To change the boot mode, start the BIOS setup utility and set boot mode to UEFI or Legacy Support on the boot menu. When do I need to change the boot mode?

The default boot mode for your computer is UEFI mode. If you need to install a legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc (that is, any operating system before Windows 8) on your computer, you must change the boot mode to Legacy Support. The legacy operating system, such as Windows, Linux or Dos, etc cannot be installed if you don't change the boot mode. 33 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Getting help How can I contact the customer support center?

See Chapter 3. Getting help and service in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 34 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. The screen goes blank while the computer is on. Sleep problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on. If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The AC power adapter is connected to the computer, and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. Press the Power button again for confirmation. If these items are set correctly, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced. Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to its original factory contents using the Lenovo OneKey Recovery system. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced. Your power management is enabled. Do one of the following to resume from sleep mode:

- Press any key on the keyboard. (Notebook mode only)

- Press the Power button.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off. The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC power adapter to the computer. Make sure that:

- The battery is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 35 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting The computer does not return from sleep mode and the computer does not work. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC power adapter to the computer, then press the Windows button or the Power button. If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the Power button for eight seconds or more. If the computer still does not reset, remove the AC power adapter. Display panel problems The screen is blank. Do the following:

- If you are using the AC power adapter or the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press F12 (

) to make the screen brighter.

- If the power indicator is blinking, press the Power button to resume from sleep mode.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off.

- If the problem persists, follow the solution in the next problem The screen is unreadable or distorted. Make sure that:

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. Is the operating system or programs installed correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Incorrect characters appear on the screen. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speakers even when the volume is turned up. Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The combo audio jack is not being used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device. 36 Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. Other problems Your computer does not respond. The connected external device does not work. Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Recharge the battery. To turn off your computer, press and hold the Power button for eight seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC power adapter. Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network. Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on. Otherwise, you might damage your computer. When using high power consumption external devices, such as an external USB optical disk drive, use an external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or the system may shut down as a result. 37 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo OneKey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 38



L e n o v o C h n a 2 0 1 5 i en-US Rev. AA00 FCC Compliance Statement

 7KLV GHYLFH FRPSOLHV ZLWK 3DUW  RI WKH )&& 5XOHV 2SHUDWLRQ LV VXEMHFW WR WKH

IROORZLQJWZRFRQGLWLRQVWKLVGHYLFHPD\QRWFDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHDQGWKLV

GHYLFH PXVW DFFHSW DQ\ LQWHUIHUHQFH UHFHLYHG LQFOXGLQJ LQWHUIHUHQFH WKDW PD\ FDXVH

XQGHVLUHGRSHUDWLRQ



 7KH XVHUV PDQXDO RU LQVWUXFWLRQ PDQXDO IRU DQ LQWHQWLRQDO RU XQLQWHQWLRQDO UDGLDWRU

VKDOOFDXWLRQWKHXVHUWKDWFKDQJHVRUPRGLILFDWLRQVQRWH[SUHVVO\DSSURYHGE\WKHSDUW\

UHVSRQVLEOHIRUFRPSOLDQFHFRXOGYRLGWKHXVHU VDXWKRULW\WRRSHUDWHWKHHTXLSPHQW,Q

FDVHV ZKHUH WKH PDQXDO LV SURYLGHG RQO\ LQ D IRUP RWKHU WKDQ SDSHU VXFK DV RQ D

FRPSXWHU GLVN RU RYHU WKH ,QWHUQHW WKH LQIRUPDWLRQ UHTXLUHG E\WK LV VHFWLRQ PD\ EH

LQFOXGHGLQWKHPDQXDOLQWKDWDOWHUQDWLYHIRUPSURYLGHGWKHXVHUFDQUHDVRQDEO\EH

H[SHFWHGWRKDYHWKHFDSDELOLW\WRDFFHVVLQIRUPDWLRQLQWKDWIRUP

&$87,21&KDQJHVRUPRGLILFDWLRQVQRWH[SUHVVO\DSSURYHGE\WKHSDUW\UHVSRQVLEOH

IRUFRPSOLDQFHFRXOGYRLGWKHXVHU VDXWKRULW\WRRSHUDWHWKHHTXLSPHQW



127(7KLVHTXLSPHQWKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGIRXQGWRFRPSO\ZLWKWKHOLPLWVIRUD&ODVV

%GLJLWDOGHYLFHSXUVXDQWWR3DUWRIWKH)&&5XOHV7KHVHOLPLWVDUHGHVLJQHGWR

SURYLGHUHDVRQDEOHSURWHFWLRQDJDLQVWKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHLQDUHVLGHQWLDOLQVWDOODWLRQ 

7KLV HTXLSPHQW JHQHUDWHV XVHV DQG FDQ UDGLDWH UDGLR IUHTXHQF\ HQHUJ\ DQG LI QRW

LQVWDOOHGDQGXVHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHLQVWUXFWLRQVPD\FDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFH

WRUDGLRFRPPXQLFDWLRQV

+RZHYHUWKHUHLVQRJXDUDQWHHWKDWLQWHUIHUHQFHZLOOQRWRFFXULQDSDUWLFXODULQVWDOODWLRQ

,IWKLVHTXLSPHQWGRHVFDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHWRUDGLRRUWHOHYLVLRQUHFHSWLRQZKLFK

FDQEHGHWHUPLQHGE\WXUQLQJWKHHTXLSPHQWRIIDQGRQWKHXVHULVHQFRXUDJHGWRWU\WR

FRUUHFWWKHLQWHUIHUHQFHE\RQHRUPRUHRIWKHIROORZLQJPHDVXUHV 

5HRULHQWRUUHORFDWHWKHUHFHLYLQJDQWHQQD 

,QFUHDVHWKHVHSDUDWLRQEHWZHHQWKHHTXLSPHQWDQGUHFHLYHU 

&RQQHFWWKHHTXLSPHQWLQWRDQRXWOHWRQDFLUFXLWGLIIHUHQWIURPWKDWWRZKLFKWKHUHFHLYHU

LVFRQQHFWHG 

&RQVXOWWKHGHDOHURUDQH[SHULHQFHGUDGLR79WHFKQLFLDQIRUKHOS



7KLVGHYLFHKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGPHHWVWKH)&&5)H[SRVXUHJXLGHOLQHV

7KHPD[LPXPPHDVXUHG6$5YDOXHLV:NJ















Industry Canada(IC)

7KLVGHYLFHFRPSOLHVZLWK,QGXVWU\&DQDGDOLFHQFHH[HPSW566VWDQGDUG V2SHUDWLRQLV

VXEMHFWWRWKHIROORZLQJWZRFRQGLWLRQVWKLVGHYLFHPD\QRWFDXVHLQWHUIHUHQFHDQGWKLV

GHYLFHPXVW DFFHSW DQ\ LQWHUIHUHQFH LQFOXGLQJ LQWHUIHUHQFH WKDW PD\ FDXVH XQGHVLUHG

RSHUDWLRQRIWKHGHYLFH



/HSUpVHQWDSSDUHLOHVWFRQIRUPHDX[&15G

,QGXVWULH&DQDGDDSSOLFDEOHVDX[DSSDUHLOV

UDGLRH[HPSWVGHOLFHQFH/

H[SORLWDWLRQHVWDXWRULVpHDX[GHX[FRQGLWLRQVVXLYDQWHV

O DSSDUHLOQHGRLWSDVSURGXLUHGHEURXLOODJHHWO XWLOLVDWHXUGHO DSSDUHLOGRLWDFFHSWHUWRXW

EURXLOODJHUDGLRpOHFWULTXHVXELPrPHVLOHEURXLOODJHHVWVXVFHSWLEOHG HQFRPSURPHWWUHOH

IRQFWLRQQHPHQW

3. 7KLVGHYLFHKDVEHHQWHVWHGIRUFRPSOLDQFHZLWK)&&5)([SRVXUH6$5OLPLWVLQW\SLFDO

IODWFRQILJXUDWLRQV



,QRUGHUWRFRPSO\ZLWK6$5OLPLWVHVWDEOLVKHGLQWKH566 $16,&VWDQGDUGVLWLV

UHFRPPHQGHGZKHQXVLQJDEJQ57/%(&RPERPRGXOHWKDWWKHLQWHJUDWHG

DQWHQQDLVSRVLWLRQHGPRUHWKDQFPIURP\RXUERG\RUQHDUE\SHUVRQVGXULQJH[WHQGHG

SHULRGVRIRSHUDWLRQ,IWKHDQWHQQDLVSRVLWLRQHGOHVVWKDQFPIURPWKHXVHULWLV

UHFRPPHQGHGWKDWWKHXVHUOLPLWWKHH[SRVXUHWLPH

&HWpTXLSHPHQWDpWpWHVWpDYHFH[SRVLWLRQ)&&5)6$5GDQVOHVOLPLWHVG XQH

FRQILJXUDWLRQSODQDLUHW\SLTXH

,QRUGHUWRFRPSO\ZLWK6$5OLPLWVHVWDEOLVKHGLQWKH566 $16,&VWDQGDUGVLWLV

UHFRPPHQGHGZKHQXVLQJDEJQ57/%(&RPERPRGXOHWKDWWKHLQWHJUDWHG

DQWHQQDLVSRVLWLRQHGPRUHWKDQFPIURP\RXUERG\RUQHDUE\SHUVRQVGXULQJH[WHQGHG

SHULRGVRIRSHUDWLRQ,IWKHDQWHQQDLVSRVLWLRQHGOHVVWKDQFPIURPWKHXVHULWLV

UHFRPPHQGHGWKDWWKHXVHUOLPLWWKHH[SRVXUHWLPH

$ILQGHUHVSHFWHUOHVOLPLWHV6$5pWDEOLGDQVUVV $16,&VWDQGDUGLOHVW

UHFRPPDQGpG XWLOLVHUEJQUWOEHGHPRGXOHGHFRPELQDLVRQXQHDQWHQQH

LQWpJUpHGDQVSOXVGHFPjWRLRXjSUR[LPLWpORUVTXHOHWHPSVGHWUDYDLO6LO XWLOLVDWHXUGH

O DQWHQQHHVWVLWXpHjPRLQVGHFPHWUHFRPPDQGHGHOLPLWHUOHWHPSVG H[SRVLWLRQGH

O XWLOLVDWHXU

















Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2012, 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Ninth Edition: December 2013 First Edition: March 2012 Document Part Number: 689409-009 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients and personal workstations. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers ..................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union regulatory notices ...................................................................................................... 4 Declaration of Conformity .................................................................................................... 4 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) .......................................................... 5 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality .............................................. 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ..................................... 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................... 5 Germany (English text) ....................................................................... 5 Germany (Deutscher text) .................................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ........................................................................................................ 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................. 7 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 8 Taiwan NCC notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 8 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ............................... 8 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................... 9 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................... 9 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................. 9 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 9 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 10 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 10 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 10 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 11 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 12 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 13 v Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 13 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 13 Voice support .................................................................................................... 14 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 14 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 14 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 14 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 14 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ........................................................ 15 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 15 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 15 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 15 Canadian modem statements ............................................................................................ 16 Japanese modem statements ............................................................................................ 17 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 17 Voice support .................................................................................................... 17 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ................................................................................................ 18 Federal Communications Commission notice ................................................................... 18 Modifications ..................................................................................................... 18 Cables ............................................................................................................... 18 Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ....................................................................................................... 19 Products with wireless LAN devices ................................................................. 19 Australia telecom statement .............................................................................................. 19 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................... 20 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................. 20 European Union regulatory notices ................................................................................... 20 Declaration of Conformity .................................................................................. 20 Products with wireless functionality (EMF) ....................................... 21 Restrictions for product with wireless functionality ........................... 21 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................... 21 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................ 21 Japan notice ...................................................................................................................... 22 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings .......................................... 22 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................... 22 Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................... 23 Taiwan NCC notices .......................................................................................................... 23 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ......................................................................... 23 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ............. 23 vi 3 Safety notices for notebook computers .......................................................................................................... 24 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 24 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 24 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 24 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 25 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 25 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................... 25 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 25 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 25 China safety notices ........................................................................................................................... 26 China: Altitude notice ......................................................................................................... 26 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................... 26 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 26 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ............................................................... 27 Important safety information ............................................................................................................... 27 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................... 27 Battery replacement notice ................................................................................................................. 28 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 28 Laser safety ........................................................................................................................................ 29 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................ 29 Power supply class I grounding requirements ................................................................... 29 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................... 29 Denmark ............................................................................................................ 29 Finland .............................................................................................................. 29 Norway .............................................................................................................. 29 Sweden ............................................................................................................. 29 Power supply requirements ............................................................................................... 29 For use in Norway ............................................................................................. 30 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................. 30 Japan power cord requirements ........................................................................................ 30 Pinch hazard ...................................................................................................................................... 30 TV antenna connectors protection ..................................................................................................... 31 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................... 31 Lightning protection ........................................................................................................... 31 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................... 32 China safety notices ........................................................................................................................... 32 China: Altitude notice ......................................................................................................... 32 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................... 33 Germany acoustics notice .................................................................................................................. 33 vii 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers .............................................................................................. 34 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................... 34 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................... 34 Brazil battery disposal ........................................................................................................................ 34 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 35 China environmental notices .............................................................................................................. 35 China PC energy label ....................................................................................................................... 35 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 38 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................. 41 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 41 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................. 41 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 41 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................ 41 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations .................................................. 42 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................... 42 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................... 42 Brazil battery disposal ........................................................................................................................ 42 ENERGY STAR qualification (select models only) .......................................................................... 43 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 44 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................. 44 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply .............................................................................. 44 China PC energy label ....................................................................................................................... 44 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 47 The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................... 48 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................. 49 IT ECO declarations ........................................................................................................................... 49 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ........................................................................... 49 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) ............................................................................................................................................ 49 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 50

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS)) ........................................................................................................................... 50 TCO Certified Edge Certification ........................................................................................................ 51 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 52 viii 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. For Windows 7, to view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (such as Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. 2. 3. For Windows 8, follow these instructions:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. 1 Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC;

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions, but a minimum distance of 1 cm should be maintained from the antennas. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) European Union regulatory notices 5 Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Japan notices 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notices Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. South Korea notices 7 This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general in household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after <= 15 minutes (varies by model) Initiate Sleep after <= 30 minutes (varies by model) The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Airline travel notice 9 Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Modem notices 11 U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Modem notices 13 Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. Modem notices 15 The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. 16 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. b. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). d. Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Modem notices 17 Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. 18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Declaration of conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding the product, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Or, call (281) 514-3333. To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 19 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC; EMC Directive 2004/108/EC; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC;

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS:HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Products with wireless functionality (EMF) This product meets international guidelines (ICNIRP) for exposure to radio frequency radiation. This product may incorporate a radio transmitting and receiving device. For desktop computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Restrictions for product with wireless functionality This product is designed for use without restrictions in all EU countries, plus Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway, and Switzerland. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable German ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-mouse and monitor. Germany (Deutscher text) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 Japan notice B VCCI-B Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. South Korea notices 20cm

. 22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and personnel. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Electromagnetic compatibility notices 23 3 Safety notices for notebook computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 24 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded

(earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Headset and earphone volume level notice 25 China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. 26 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded

(earthed) 3-pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. CAUTION:

system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950). If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. Important safety information 27 WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery replacement notice WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:

Do not attempt to recharge the battery. Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. For information about removing a battery, refer to your computer documentation. Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. If the computer includes a headset or earphones and bears the "GS" mark, this combination is in compliance with EN 50332-1. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with these products should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. 28 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or a Hewlett-

Packard authorized replacement. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark For tilslutning af de vrige ledere, se medflgende installationsvejledning. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag, nr den ansluts till ett ntverk. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts Laser safety 29 AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from Hewlett-Packard. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-

bin/hpsupport/index.pl. For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. Power cord set requirements The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from Hewlett-Packard or an approved HP source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m (6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. 2. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 4-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire TV antenna connectors protection 31 Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m 2000m or 2000 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Germany acoustics notice 33 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/

recycle. Brazil battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 This product and its electronics components must not be discarded with your household waste. Although the product components were manufactured in accordance with world standards restricting harmful substances, the product may contain, even in minute quantities, substances impacting the environment. At the end of the useful life of this product, you should return the product to HP. Failure to follow this guidance will subject the violator to the penalties provided by law. When a battery used in the HP product has reached the end of its useful life, you should return the battery either to HP or to the company commissioned by HP for technical support. Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP 34 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/

reciclar Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China environmental notices http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

( http://www. sepa.gov.cn) China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers (CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A Category B Category C TEC (kilowatt hour) Grade 1 98.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa Grade 2 148.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 209.0+Efa Grade 3 198.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Chemical substances 35 Product Type Portable Computer TEC (kilowatt hour) Category D Category A Category B Category C 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. 3. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Category D Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB283802012

:

1. 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers

() A B C D A B C 1 2 3 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128 . CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 GB28380-2012 China PC energy label 37 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB) (PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 39

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB) (PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T11363-2006 X SJ/T11363-2006 X RoHS 2003 1 27 2002/95/EC

:

40 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil battery disposal HEWLETT PACKARD BRASIL LTDA (HP) AV. JOS LUIZ MAZALI N 360 - GALPO B-PARTE 1-BAIRRO RESIDENCIAL BURCK - LOUVEIRA/SP - CEP: 13290-000 No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum CNPJ: 61.797.924/0007-40 Centro de Informaes HP: (11) 4004-7751 ou 0800-7097751 This product and its electronics components must not be discarded with your household waste. Although the product components were manufactured in accordance with world standards restricting harmful substances, the product may contain, even in minute quantities, substances impacting the environment. At the end of the useful life of this product, you should return the product to HP. Failure to follow this guidance will subject the violator to the penalties provided by law. When a battery used in the HP product has reached the end of its useful life, you should return the battery either to HP or to the company commissioned by HP for technical support. Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/

reciclar 42 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ENERGY STAR qualification (select models only) NOTE: This section applies only to products bearing the ENERGY STAR logo. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR-qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-

qualified computers. The ENERGY STAR Computers Program was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way products achieve this energy efficiency is by reducing power consumption when not being used through the Microsoft Windows Power Management feature. The Power Management feature enables the computer to enter a low-power (or sleep) mode after a period of inactivity. When used with an external monitor that is ENERGY STAR-qualified, this feature also supports the similar power management features of the external monitor. To take advantage of this energy savings, the Power Management feature has been preset to power down the computer and monitor within the following specified periods of inactivity:

Computer Within 30 minutes Monitor/Integrated Display Within 15 minutes Both the computer and monitor can be woken from sleep mode through user interaction with any of the computer input devices (mouse, keyboard, and so on). When configured with Wake On LAN

(WOL) enabled, the computer can also be woken by a network signal. See the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site for more information about the energy and financial savings potential of the Power Management Feature: http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. See the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site for more information about the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits: http://www.energystar.gov. CAUTION: Using the Energy Save Monitor feature with monitors that are not ENERGY STAR-

qualified can cause video distortion when an Energy Save timeout occurs. NOTE: ENERGY STAR is not supported on desktop computers, integrated desktop computers, small-scale servers and workstations configured with some versions of Linux or FreeDOS. If it is necessary to restore the operating system, you must also reset the ENERGY STAR settings (if applicable) after the restore. For Windows 7, to verify the factory default power settings for your desktop or workstation, select Start > Control Panel, and then type Power Options in the search window. For Windows 8, to verify the factory default power settings for your desktop or workstation, from the Start screen, type power, select Settings, and then select Power Options from the list of applications. ENERGY STAR qualification (select models only) 43 Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers (CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A Category B Category C Category D TEC (kilowatt hour) Grade 1 98.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa Grade 2 148.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 234.0+Efa Grade 3 198.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 44 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Product Type Portable Computer TEC (kilowatt hour) Category A Category B Category C 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. 3. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Category D Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. CEL30 GB283802012

:

1.

() 1 2 3 China PC energy label 45

() A B C D A B C 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa Efa 2. 3. A B C D B C D CPU 2 2GB CPU 2 a. a 2GB b. GPU) B C GPU CPU 2 2GB GPU 128 . CPU 4 a. 4GB b. GPU 128 GB28380-2012 46 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS)

I/O PCAs

O: SJ/T11363-2006

X: SJ/T11363-2006

XRoHS 20031272002/95/EC

China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 47 The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Table 6-1 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink X Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 48 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal

(modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 49 NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Turkey EEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur

(Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS))

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. 50 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations TCO Certified Edge Certification This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. TCO Certified Edge Certification 51 Index A airline travel notice 9 altitude notice 26, 32 B battery notice 9, 24, 41 battery recycling 34 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 26 Canada modem statement 13 Canada notices 4 China environmental notices 35 China PC energy label 35, 44 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 38, 47 D Declaration of Conformity notebook computers 3 disposal notices battery 41 battery, user replacement 9 equipment 34 factory sealed battery 9 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 34 ENERGY STAR compliance 9 environmental notices 34 equipment disposal notice 34 ergonomics notice 5, 21 European Union notices 4, 20 F Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients and workstations notice 18 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 18 52 Index desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 18 notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 notebook computers notice 2 G GS Notice 5, 21 H headset and earphone volume level notice 25 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 49 J Japan material content declaration 41 Japan modem statement 13 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 14 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 49 K keyboard notice 25 L laser safety notice 10 M Macrovision Corporation notice 14 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law 41 Mexico wireless notice 7 modem notices 10 modem statements Canada 13 Japan 13 New Zealand 13 U.S. 11 modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations Federal Communications Commission 18 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 13 notices airline travel 9 battery 9, 41 battery, user replacement 24 Brazil 4 Canada 4 China restriction of hazardous substances 38, 47 environmental 34 equipment disposal 34 ergonomics 5, 21 European Union 4, 20 headset and earphone volume level 25 India restriction of hazardous substances 41, 49 Japan 6 Japan power cord 14 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 49 keyboard 25 laser safety 10 Macrovision Corporation 14 Mexico 7 modem 10 perchlorate material 41 power cords 14, 25 Singapore 7 South Korea 7 Taiwan 8, 23 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 8 travel 25 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 41, 50 notices, desktops, thin clients and workstations Federal Communications Commission 18 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 P power cord notice 14, 25 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 34 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7 T Taiwan notice 8, 23 TCO Certified Edge Certification 51 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 8 travel notice 25 tropical warning notice 26, 33 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 26 U U.S. modem statement 11 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 50 V voice support 14 volume level notice, headset and earphone 25 W wireless LAN devices 3, 19, 20 Index 53